1@c Copyright (C) 1988, 1989, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1996, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2@c 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011 3@c Free Software Foundation, Inc. 4@c This is part of the GCC manual. 5@c For copying conditions, see the file gcc.texi. 6 7@ifset INTERNALS 8@node Machine Desc 9@chapter Machine Descriptions 10@cindex machine descriptions 11 12A machine description has two parts: a file of instruction patterns 13(@file{.md} file) and a C header file of macro definitions. 14 15The @file{.md} file for a target machine contains a pattern for each 16instruction that the target machine supports (or at least each instruction 17that is worth telling the compiler about). It may also contain comments. 18A semicolon causes the rest of the line to be a comment, unless the semicolon 19is inside a quoted string. 20 21See the next chapter for information on the C header file. 22 23@menu 24* Overview:: How the machine description is used. 25* Patterns:: How to write instruction patterns. 26* Example:: An explained example of a @code{define_insn} pattern. 27* RTL Template:: The RTL template defines what insns match a pattern. 28* Output Template:: The output template says how to make assembler code 29 from such an insn. 30* Output Statement:: For more generality, write C code to output 31 the assembler code. 32* Predicates:: Controlling what kinds of operands can be used 33 for an insn. 34* Constraints:: Fine-tuning operand selection. 35* Standard Names:: Names mark patterns to use for code generation. 36* Pattern Ordering:: When the order of patterns makes a difference. 37* Dependent Patterns:: Having one pattern may make you need another. 38* Jump Patterns:: Special considerations for patterns for jump insns. 39* Looping Patterns:: How to define patterns for special looping insns. 40* Insn Canonicalizations::Canonicalization of Instructions 41* Expander Definitions::Generating a sequence of several RTL insns 42 for a standard operation. 43* Insn Splitting:: Splitting Instructions into Multiple Instructions. 44* Including Patterns:: Including Patterns in Machine Descriptions. 45* Peephole Definitions::Defining machine-specific peephole optimizations. 46* Insn Attributes:: Specifying the value of attributes for generated insns. 47* Conditional Execution::Generating @code{define_insn} patterns for 48 predication. 49* Constant Definitions::Defining symbolic constants that can be used in the 50 md file. 51* Iterators:: Using iterators to generate patterns from a template. 52@end menu 53 54@node Overview 55@section Overview of How the Machine Description is Used 56 57There are three main conversions that happen in the compiler: 58 59@enumerate 60 61@item 62The front end reads the source code and builds a parse tree. 63 64@item 65The parse tree is used to generate an RTL insn list based on named 66instruction patterns. 67 68@item 69The insn list is matched against the RTL templates to produce assembler 70code. 71 72@end enumerate 73 74For the generate pass, only the names of the insns matter, from either a 75named @code{define_insn} or a @code{define_expand}. The compiler will 76choose the pattern with the right name and apply the operands according 77to the documentation later in this chapter, without regard for the RTL 78template or operand constraints. Note that the names the compiler looks 79for are hard-coded in the compiler---it will ignore unnamed patterns and 80patterns with names it doesn't know about, but if you don't provide a 81named pattern it needs, it will abort. 82 83If a @code{define_insn} is used, the template given is inserted into the 84insn list. If a @code{define_expand} is used, one of three things 85happens, based on the condition logic. The condition logic may manually 86create new insns for the insn list, say via @code{emit_insn()}, and 87invoke @code{DONE}. For certain named patterns, it may invoke @code{FAIL} to tell the 88compiler to use an alternate way of performing that task. If it invokes 89neither @code{DONE} nor @code{FAIL}, the template given in the pattern 90is inserted, as if the @code{define_expand} were a @code{define_insn}. 91 92Once the insn list is generated, various optimization passes convert, 93replace, and rearrange the insns in the insn list. This is where the 94@code{define_split} and @code{define_peephole} patterns get used, for 95example. 96 97Finally, the insn list's RTL is matched up with the RTL templates in the 98@code{define_insn} patterns, and those patterns are used to emit the 99final assembly code. For this purpose, each named @code{define_insn} 100acts like it's unnamed, since the names are ignored. 101 102@node Patterns 103@section Everything about Instruction Patterns 104@cindex patterns 105@cindex instruction patterns 106 107@findex define_insn 108Each instruction pattern contains an incomplete RTL expression, with pieces 109to be filled in later, operand constraints that restrict how the pieces can 110be filled in, and an output pattern or C code to generate the assembler 111output, all wrapped up in a @code{define_insn} expression. 112 113A @code{define_insn} is an RTL expression containing four or five operands: 114 115@enumerate 116@item 117An optional name. The presence of a name indicate that this instruction 118pattern can perform a certain standard job for the RTL-generation 119pass of the compiler. This pass knows certain names and will use 120the instruction patterns with those names, if the names are defined 121in the machine description. 122 123The absence of a name is indicated by writing an empty string 124where the name should go. Nameless instruction patterns are never 125used for generating RTL code, but they may permit several simpler insns 126to be combined later on. 127 128Names that are not thus known and used in RTL-generation have no 129effect; they are equivalent to no name at all. 130 131For the purpose of debugging the compiler, you may also specify a 132name beginning with the @samp{*} character. Such a name is used only 133for identifying the instruction in RTL dumps; it is entirely equivalent 134to having a nameless pattern for all other purposes. 135 136@item 137The @dfn{RTL template} (@pxref{RTL Template}) is a vector of incomplete 138RTL expressions which show what the instruction should look like. It is 139incomplete because it may contain @code{match_operand}, 140@code{match_operator}, and @code{match_dup} expressions that stand for 141operands of the instruction. 142 143If the vector has only one element, that element is the template for the 144instruction pattern. If the vector has multiple elements, then the 145instruction pattern is a @code{parallel} expression containing the 146elements described. 147 148@item 149@cindex pattern conditions 150@cindex conditions, in patterns 151A condition. This is a string which contains a C expression that is 152the final test to decide whether an insn body matches this pattern. 153 154@cindex named patterns and conditions 155For a named pattern, the condition (if present) may not depend on 156the data in the insn being matched, but only the target-machine-type 157flags. The compiler needs to test these conditions during 158initialization in order to learn exactly which named instructions are 159available in a particular run. 160 161@findex operands 162For nameless patterns, the condition is applied only when matching an 163individual insn, and only after the insn has matched the pattern's 164recognition template. The insn's operands may be found in the vector 165@code{operands}. For an insn where the condition has once matched, it 166can't be used to control register allocation, for example by excluding 167certain hard registers or hard register combinations. 168 169@item 170The @dfn{output template}: a string that says how to output matching 171insns as assembler code. @samp{%} in this string specifies where 172to substitute the value of an operand. @xref{Output Template}. 173 174When simple substitution isn't general enough, you can specify a piece 175of C code to compute the output. @xref{Output Statement}. 176 177@item 178Optionally, a vector containing the values of attributes for insns matching 179this pattern. @xref{Insn Attributes}. 180@end enumerate 181 182@node Example 183@section Example of @code{define_insn} 184@cindex @code{define_insn} example 185 186Here is an actual example of an instruction pattern, for the 68000/68020. 187 188@smallexample 189(define_insn "tstsi" 190 [(set (cc0) 191 (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "rm"))] 192 "" 193 "* 194@{ 195 if (TARGET_68020 || ! ADDRESS_REG_P (operands[0])) 196 return \"tstl %0\"; 197 return \"cmpl #0,%0\"; 198@}") 199@end smallexample 200 201@noindent 202This can also be written using braced strings: 203 204@smallexample 205(define_insn "tstsi" 206 [(set (cc0) 207 (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "rm"))] 208 "" 209@{ 210 if (TARGET_68020 || ! ADDRESS_REG_P (operands[0])) 211 return "tstl %0"; 212 return "cmpl #0,%0"; 213@}) 214@end smallexample 215 216This is an instruction that sets the condition codes based on the value of 217a general operand. It has no condition, so any insn whose RTL description 218has the form shown may be handled according to this pattern. The name 219@samp{tstsi} means ``test a @code{SImode} value'' and tells the RTL generation 220pass that, when it is necessary to test such a value, an insn to do so 221can be constructed using this pattern. 222 223The output control string is a piece of C code which chooses which 224output template to return based on the kind of operand and the specific 225type of CPU for which code is being generated. 226 227@samp{"rm"} is an operand constraint. Its meaning is explained below. 228 229@node RTL Template 230@section RTL Template 231@cindex RTL insn template 232@cindex generating insns 233@cindex insns, generating 234@cindex recognizing insns 235@cindex insns, recognizing 236 237The RTL template is used to define which insns match the particular pattern 238and how to find their operands. For named patterns, the RTL template also 239says how to construct an insn from specified operands. 240 241Construction involves substituting specified operands into a copy of the 242template. Matching involves determining the values that serve as the 243operands in the insn being matched. Both of these activities are 244controlled by special expression types that direct matching and 245substitution of the operands. 246 247@table @code 248@findex match_operand 249@item (match_operand:@var{m} @var{n} @var{predicate} @var{constraint}) 250This expression is a placeholder for operand number @var{n} of 251the insn. When constructing an insn, operand number @var{n} 252will be substituted at this point. When matching an insn, whatever 253appears at this position in the insn will be taken as operand 254number @var{n}; but it must satisfy @var{predicate} or this instruction 255pattern will not match at all. 256 257Operand numbers must be chosen consecutively counting from zero in 258each instruction pattern. There may be only one @code{match_operand} 259expression in the pattern for each operand number. Usually operands 260are numbered in the order of appearance in @code{match_operand} 261expressions. In the case of a @code{define_expand}, any operand numbers 262used only in @code{match_dup} expressions have higher values than all 263other operand numbers. 264 265@var{predicate} is a string that is the name of a function that 266accepts two arguments, an expression and a machine mode. 267@xref{Predicates}. During matching, the function will be called with 268the putative operand as the expression and @var{m} as the mode 269argument (if @var{m} is not specified, @code{VOIDmode} will be used, 270which normally causes @var{predicate} to accept any mode). If it 271returns zero, this instruction pattern fails to match. 272@var{predicate} may be an empty string; then it means no test is to be 273done on the operand, so anything which occurs in this position is 274valid. 275 276Most of the time, @var{predicate} will reject modes other than @var{m}---but 277not always. For example, the predicate @code{address_operand} uses 278@var{m} as the mode of memory ref that the address should be valid for. 279Many predicates accept @code{const_int} nodes even though their mode is 280@code{VOIDmode}. 281 282@var{constraint} controls reloading and the choice of the best register 283class to use for a value, as explained later (@pxref{Constraints}). 284If the constraint would be an empty string, it can be omitted. 285 286People are often unclear on the difference between the constraint and the 287predicate. The predicate helps decide whether a given insn matches the 288pattern. The constraint plays no role in this decision; instead, it 289controls various decisions in the case of an insn which does match. 290 291@findex match_scratch 292@item (match_scratch:@var{m} @var{n} @var{constraint}) 293This expression is also a placeholder for operand number @var{n} 294and indicates that operand must be a @code{scratch} or @code{reg} 295expression. 296 297When matching patterns, this is equivalent to 298 299@smallexample 300(match_operand:@var{m} @var{n} "scratch_operand" @var{pred}) 301@end smallexample 302 303but, when generating RTL, it produces a (@code{scratch}:@var{m}) 304expression. 305 306If the last few expressions in a @code{parallel} are @code{clobber} 307expressions whose operands are either a hard register or 308@code{match_scratch}, the combiner can add or delete them when 309necessary. @xref{Side Effects}. 310 311@findex match_dup 312@item (match_dup @var{n}) 313This expression is also a placeholder for operand number @var{n}. 314It is used when the operand needs to appear more than once in the 315insn. 316 317In construction, @code{match_dup} acts just like @code{match_operand}: 318the operand is substituted into the insn being constructed. But in 319matching, @code{match_dup} behaves differently. It assumes that operand 320number @var{n} has already been determined by a @code{match_operand} 321appearing earlier in the recognition template, and it matches only an 322identical-looking expression. 323 324Note that @code{match_dup} should not be used to tell the compiler that 325a particular register is being used for two operands (example: 326@code{add} that adds one register to another; the second register is 327both an input operand and the output operand). Use a matching 328constraint (@pxref{Simple Constraints}) for those. @code{match_dup} is for the cases where one 329operand is used in two places in the template, such as an instruction 330that computes both a quotient and a remainder, where the opcode takes 331two input operands but the RTL template has to refer to each of those 332twice; once for the quotient pattern and once for the remainder pattern. 333 334@findex match_operator 335@item (match_operator:@var{m} @var{n} @var{predicate} [@var{operands}@dots{}]) 336This pattern is a kind of placeholder for a variable RTL expression 337code. 338 339When constructing an insn, it stands for an RTL expression whose 340expression code is taken from that of operand @var{n}, and whose 341operands are constructed from the patterns @var{operands}. 342 343When matching an expression, it matches an expression if the function 344@var{predicate} returns nonzero on that expression @emph{and} the 345patterns @var{operands} match the operands of the expression. 346 347Suppose that the function @code{commutative_operator} is defined as 348follows, to match any expression whose operator is one of the 349commutative arithmetic operators of RTL and whose mode is @var{mode}: 350 351@smallexample 352int 353commutative_integer_operator (x, mode) 354 rtx x; 355 enum machine_mode mode; 356@{ 357 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x); 358 if (GET_MODE (x) != mode) 359 return 0; 360 return (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == RTX_COMM_ARITH 361 || code == EQ || code == NE); 362@} 363@end smallexample 364 365Then the following pattern will match any RTL expression consisting 366of a commutative operator applied to two general operands: 367 368@smallexample 369(match_operator:SI 3 "commutative_operator" 370 [(match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "g") 371 (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "g")]) 372@end smallexample 373 374Here the vector @code{[@var{operands}@dots{}]} contains two patterns 375because the expressions to be matched all contain two operands. 376 377When this pattern does match, the two operands of the commutative 378operator are recorded as operands 1 and 2 of the insn. (This is done 379by the two instances of @code{match_operand}.) Operand 3 of the insn 380will be the entire commutative expression: use @code{GET_CODE 381(operands[3])} to see which commutative operator was used. 382 383The machine mode @var{m} of @code{match_operator} works like that of 384@code{match_operand}: it is passed as the second argument to the 385predicate function, and that function is solely responsible for 386deciding whether the expression to be matched ``has'' that mode. 387 388When constructing an insn, argument 3 of the gen-function will specify 389the operation (i.e.@: the expression code) for the expression to be 390made. It should be an RTL expression, whose expression code is copied 391into a new expression whose operands are arguments 1 and 2 of the 392gen-function. The subexpressions of argument 3 are not used; 393only its expression code matters. 394 395When @code{match_operator} is used in a pattern for matching an insn, 396it usually best if the operand number of the @code{match_operator} 397is higher than that of the actual operands of the insn. This improves 398register allocation because the register allocator often looks at 399operands 1 and 2 of insns to see if it can do register tying. 400 401There is no way to specify constraints in @code{match_operator}. The 402operand of the insn which corresponds to the @code{match_operator} 403never has any constraints because it is never reloaded as a whole. 404However, if parts of its @var{operands} are matched by 405@code{match_operand} patterns, those parts may have constraints of 406their own. 407 408@findex match_op_dup 409@item (match_op_dup:@var{m} @var{n}[@var{operands}@dots{}]) 410Like @code{match_dup}, except that it applies to operators instead of 411operands. When constructing an insn, operand number @var{n} will be 412substituted at this point. But in matching, @code{match_op_dup} behaves 413differently. It assumes that operand number @var{n} has already been 414determined by a @code{match_operator} appearing earlier in the 415recognition template, and it matches only an identical-looking 416expression. 417 418@findex match_parallel 419@item (match_parallel @var{n} @var{predicate} [@var{subpat}@dots{}]) 420This pattern is a placeholder for an insn that consists of a 421@code{parallel} expression with a variable number of elements. This 422expression should only appear at the top level of an insn pattern. 423 424When constructing an insn, operand number @var{n} will be substituted at 425this point. When matching an insn, it matches if the body of the insn 426is a @code{parallel} expression with at least as many elements as the 427vector of @var{subpat} expressions in the @code{match_parallel}, if each 428@var{subpat} matches the corresponding element of the @code{parallel}, 429@emph{and} the function @var{predicate} returns nonzero on the 430@code{parallel} that is the body of the insn. It is the responsibility 431of the predicate to validate elements of the @code{parallel} beyond 432those listed in the @code{match_parallel}. 433 434A typical use of @code{match_parallel} is to match load and store 435multiple expressions, which can contain a variable number of elements 436in a @code{parallel}. For example, 437 438@smallexample 439(define_insn "" 440 [(match_parallel 0 "load_multiple_operation" 441 [(set (match_operand:SI 1 "gpc_reg_operand" "=r") 442 (match_operand:SI 2 "memory_operand" "m")) 443 (use (reg:SI 179)) 444 (clobber (reg:SI 179))])] 445 "" 446 "loadm 0,0,%1,%2") 447@end smallexample 448 449This example comes from @file{a29k.md}. The function 450@code{load_multiple_operation} is defined in @file{a29k.c} and checks 451that subsequent elements in the @code{parallel} are the same as the 452@code{set} in the pattern, except that they are referencing subsequent 453registers and memory locations. 454 455An insn that matches this pattern might look like: 456 457@smallexample 458(parallel 459 [(set (reg:SI 20) (mem:SI (reg:SI 100))) 460 (use (reg:SI 179)) 461 (clobber (reg:SI 179)) 462 (set (reg:SI 21) 463 (mem:SI (plus:SI (reg:SI 100) 464 (const_int 4)))) 465 (set (reg:SI 22) 466 (mem:SI (plus:SI (reg:SI 100) 467 (const_int 8))))]) 468@end smallexample 469 470@findex match_par_dup 471@item (match_par_dup @var{n} [@var{subpat}@dots{}]) 472Like @code{match_op_dup}, but for @code{match_parallel} instead of 473@code{match_operator}. 474 475@end table 476 477@node Output Template 478@section Output Templates and Operand Substitution 479@cindex output templates 480@cindex operand substitution 481 482@cindex @samp{%} in template 483@cindex percent sign 484The @dfn{output template} is a string which specifies how to output the 485assembler code for an instruction pattern. Most of the template is a 486fixed string which is output literally. The character @samp{%} is used 487to specify where to substitute an operand; it can also be used to 488identify places where different variants of the assembler require 489different syntax. 490 491In the simplest case, a @samp{%} followed by a digit @var{n} says to output 492operand @var{n} at that point in the string. 493 494@samp{%} followed by a letter and a digit says to output an operand in an 495alternate fashion. Four letters have standard, built-in meanings described 496below. The machine description macro @code{PRINT_OPERAND} can define 497additional letters with nonstandard meanings. 498 499@samp{%c@var{digit}} can be used to substitute an operand that is a 500constant value without the syntax that normally indicates an immediate 501operand. 502 503@samp{%n@var{digit}} is like @samp{%c@var{digit}} except that the value of 504the constant is negated before printing. 505 506@samp{%a@var{digit}} can be used to substitute an operand as if it were a 507memory reference, with the actual operand treated as the address. This may 508be useful when outputting a ``load address'' instruction, because often the 509assembler syntax for such an instruction requires you to write the operand 510as if it were a memory reference. 511 512@samp{%l@var{digit}} is used to substitute a @code{label_ref} into a jump 513instruction. 514 515@samp{%=} outputs a number which is unique to each instruction in the 516entire compilation. This is useful for making local labels to be 517referred to more than once in a single template that generates multiple 518assembler instructions. 519 520@samp{%} followed by a punctuation character specifies a substitution that 521does not use an operand. Only one case is standard: @samp{%%} outputs a 522@samp{%} into the assembler code. Other nonstandard cases can be 523defined in the @code{PRINT_OPERAND} macro. You must also define 524which punctuation characters are valid with the 525@code{PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P} macro. 526 527@cindex \ 528@cindex backslash 529The template may generate multiple assembler instructions. Write the text 530for the instructions, with @samp{\;} between them. 531 532@cindex matching operands 533When the RTL contains two operands which are required by constraint to match 534each other, the output template must refer only to the lower-numbered operand. 535Matching operands are not always identical, and the rest of the compiler 536arranges to put the proper RTL expression for printing into the lower-numbered 537operand. 538 539One use of nonstandard letters or punctuation following @samp{%} is to 540distinguish between different assembler languages for the same machine; for 541example, Motorola syntax versus MIT syntax for the 68000. Motorola syntax 542requires periods in most opcode names, while MIT syntax does not. For 543example, the opcode @samp{movel} in MIT syntax is @samp{move.l} in Motorola 544syntax. The same file of patterns is used for both kinds of output syntax, 545but the character sequence @samp{%.} is used in each place where Motorola 546syntax wants a period. The @code{PRINT_OPERAND} macro for Motorola syntax 547defines the sequence to output a period; the macro for MIT syntax defines 548it to do nothing. 549 550@cindex @code{#} in template 551As a special case, a template consisting of the single character @code{#} 552instructs the compiler to first split the insn, and then output the 553resulting instructions separately. This helps eliminate redundancy in the 554output templates. If you have a @code{define_insn} that needs to emit 555multiple assembler instructions, and there is a matching @code{define_split} 556already defined, then you can simply use @code{#} as the output template 557instead of writing an output template that emits the multiple assembler 558instructions. 559 560If the macro @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} is defined, you can use construct 561of the form @samp{@{option0|option1|option2@}} in the templates. These 562describe multiple variants of assembler language syntax. 563@xref{Instruction Output}. 564 565@node Output Statement 566@section C Statements for Assembler Output 567@cindex output statements 568@cindex C statements for assembler output 569@cindex generating assembler output 570 571Often a single fixed template string cannot produce correct and efficient 572assembler code for all the cases that are recognized by a single 573instruction pattern. For example, the opcodes may depend on the kinds of 574operands; or some unfortunate combinations of operands may require extra 575machine instructions. 576 577If the output control string starts with a @samp{@@}, then it is actually 578a series of templates, each on a separate line. (Blank lines and 579leading spaces and tabs are ignored.) The templates correspond to the 580pattern's constraint alternatives (@pxref{Multi-Alternative}). For example, 581if a target machine has a two-address add instruction @samp{addr} to add 582into a register and another @samp{addm} to add a register to memory, you 583might write this pattern: 584 585@smallexample 586(define_insn "addsi3" 587 [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r,m") 588 (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "0,0") 589 (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "g,r")))] 590 "" 591 "@@ 592 addr %2,%0 593 addm %2,%0") 594@end smallexample 595 596@cindex @code{*} in template 597@cindex asterisk in template 598If the output control string starts with a @samp{*}, then it is not an 599output template but rather a piece of C program that should compute a 600template. It should execute a @code{return} statement to return the 601template-string you want. Most such templates use C string literals, which 602require doublequote characters to delimit them. To include these 603doublequote characters in the string, prefix each one with @samp{\}. 604 605If the output control string is written as a brace block instead of a 606double-quoted string, it is automatically assumed to be C code. In that 607case, it is not necessary to put in a leading asterisk, or to escape the 608doublequotes surrounding C string literals. 609 610The operands may be found in the array @code{operands}, whose C data type 611is @code{rtx []}. 612 613It is very common to select different ways of generating assembler code 614based on whether an immediate operand is within a certain range. Be 615careful when doing this, because the result of @code{INTVAL} is an 616integer on the host machine. If the host machine has more bits in an 617@code{int} than the target machine has in the mode in which the constant 618will be used, then some of the bits you get from @code{INTVAL} will be 619superfluous. For proper results, you must carefully disregard the 620values of those bits. 621 622@findex output_asm_insn 623It is possible to output an assembler instruction and then go on to output 624or compute more of them, using the subroutine @code{output_asm_insn}. This 625receives two arguments: a template-string and a vector of operands. The 626vector may be @code{operands}, or it may be another array of @code{rtx} 627that you declare locally and initialize yourself. 628 629@findex which_alternative 630When an insn pattern has multiple alternatives in its constraints, often 631the appearance of the assembler code is determined mostly by which alternative 632was matched. When this is so, the C code can test the variable 633@code{which_alternative}, which is the ordinal number of the alternative 634that was actually satisfied (0 for the first, 1 for the second alternative, 635etc.). 636 637For example, suppose there are two opcodes for storing zero, @samp{clrreg} 638for registers and @samp{clrmem} for memory locations. Here is how 639a pattern could use @code{which_alternative} to choose between them: 640 641@smallexample 642(define_insn "" 643 [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r,m") 644 (const_int 0))] 645 "" 646 @{ 647 return (which_alternative == 0 648 ? "clrreg %0" : "clrmem %0"); 649 @}) 650@end smallexample 651 652The example above, where the assembler code to generate was 653@emph{solely} determined by the alternative, could also have been specified 654as follows, having the output control string start with a @samp{@@}: 655 656@smallexample 657@group 658(define_insn "" 659 [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r,m") 660 (const_int 0))] 661 "" 662 "@@ 663 clrreg %0 664 clrmem %0") 665@end group 666@end smallexample 667 668@node Predicates 669@section Predicates 670@cindex predicates 671@cindex operand predicates 672@cindex operator predicates 673 674A predicate determines whether a @code{match_operand} or 675@code{match_operator} expression matches, and therefore whether the 676surrounding instruction pattern will be used for that combination of 677operands. GCC has a number of machine-independent predicates, and you 678can define machine-specific predicates as needed. By convention, 679predicates used with @code{match_operand} have names that end in 680@samp{_operand}, and those used with @code{match_operator} have names 681that end in @samp{_operator}. 682 683All predicates are Boolean functions (in the mathematical sense) of 684two arguments: the RTL expression that is being considered at that 685position in the instruction pattern, and the machine mode that the 686@code{match_operand} or @code{match_operator} specifies. In this 687section, the first argument is called @var{op} and the second argument 688@var{mode}. Predicates can be called from C as ordinary two-argument 689functions; this can be useful in output templates or other 690machine-specific code. 691 692Operand predicates can allow operands that are not actually acceptable 693to the hardware, as long as the constraints give reload the ability to 694fix them up (@pxref{Constraints}). However, GCC will usually generate 695better code if the predicates specify the requirements of the machine 696instructions as closely as possible. Reload cannot fix up operands 697that must be constants (``immediate operands''); you must use a 698predicate that allows only constants, or else enforce the requirement 699in the extra condition. 700 701@cindex predicates and machine modes 702@cindex normal predicates 703@cindex special predicates 704Most predicates handle their @var{mode} argument in a uniform manner. 705If @var{mode} is @code{VOIDmode} (unspecified), then @var{op} can have 706any mode. If @var{mode} is anything else, then @var{op} must have the 707same mode, unless @var{op} is a @code{CONST_INT} or integer 708@code{CONST_DOUBLE}. These RTL expressions always have 709@code{VOIDmode}, so it would be counterproductive to check that their 710mode matches. Instead, predicates that accept @code{CONST_INT} and/or 711integer @code{CONST_DOUBLE} check that the value stored in the 712constant will fit in the requested mode. 713 714Predicates with this behavior are called @dfn{normal}. 715@command{genrecog} can optimize the instruction recognizer based on 716knowledge of how normal predicates treat modes. It can also diagnose 717certain kinds of common errors in the use of normal predicates; for 718instance, it is almost always an error to use a normal predicate 719without specifying a mode. 720 721Predicates that do something different with their @var{mode} argument 722are called @dfn{special}. The generic predicates 723@code{address_operand} and @code{pmode_register_operand} are special 724predicates. @command{genrecog} does not do any optimizations or 725diagnosis when special predicates are used. 726 727@menu 728* Machine-Independent Predicates:: Predicates available to all back ends. 729* Defining Predicates:: How to write machine-specific predicate 730 functions. 731@end menu 732 733@node Machine-Independent Predicates 734@subsection Machine-Independent Predicates 735@cindex machine-independent predicates 736@cindex generic predicates 737 738These are the generic predicates available to all back ends. They are 739defined in @file{recog.c}. The first category of predicates allow 740only constant, or @dfn{immediate}, operands. 741 742@defun immediate_operand 743This predicate allows any sort of constant that fits in @var{mode}. 744It is an appropriate choice for instructions that take operands that 745must be constant. 746@end defun 747 748@defun const_int_operand 749This predicate allows any @code{CONST_INT} expression that fits in 750@var{mode}. It is an appropriate choice for an immediate operand that 751does not allow a symbol or label. 752@end defun 753 754@defun const_double_operand 755This predicate accepts any @code{CONST_DOUBLE} expression that has 756exactly @var{mode}. If @var{mode} is @code{VOIDmode}, it will also 757accept @code{CONST_INT}. It is intended for immediate floating point 758constants. 759@end defun 760 761@noindent 762The second category of predicates allow only some kind of machine 763register. 764 765@defun register_operand 766This predicate allows any @code{REG} or @code{SUBREG} expression that 767is valid for @var{mode}. It is often suitable for arithmetic 768instruction operands on a RISC machine. 769@end defun 770 771@defun pmode_register_operand 772This is a slight variant on @code{register_operand} which works around 773a limitation in the machine-description reader. 774 775@smallexample 776(match_operand @var{n} "pmode_register_operand" @var{constraint}) 777@end smallexample 778 779@noindent 780means exactly what 781 782@smallexample 783(match_operand:P @var{n} "register_operand" @var{constraint}) 784@end smallexample 785 786@noindent 787would mean, if the machine-description reader accepted @samp{:P} 788mode suffixes. Unfortunately, it cannot, because @code{Pmode} is an 789alias for some other mode, and might vary with machine-specific 790options. @xref{Misc}. 791@end defun 792 793@defun scratch_operand 794This predicate allows hard registers and @code{SCRATCH} expressions, 795but not pseudo-registers. It is used internally by @code{match_scratch}; 796it should not be used directly. 797@end defun 798 799@noindent 800The third category of predicates allow only some kind of memory reference. 801 802@defun memory_operand 803This predicate allows any valid reference to a quantity of mode 804@var{mode} in memory, as determined by the weak form of 805@code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS} (@pxref{Addressing Modes}). 806@end defun 807 808@defun address_operand 809This predicate is a little unusual; it allows any operand that is a 810valid expression for the @emph{address} of a quantity of mode 811@var{mode}, again determined by the weak form of 812@code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS}. To first order, if 813@samp{@w{(mem:@var{mode} (@var{exp}))}} is acceptable to 814@code{memory_operand}, then @var{exp} is acceptable to 815@code{address_operand}. Note that @var{exp} does not necessarily have 816the mode @var{mode}. 817@end defun 818 819@defun indirect_operand 820This is a stricter form of @code{memory_operand} which allows only 821memory references with a @code{general_operand} as the address 822expression. New uses of this predicate are discouraged, because 823@code{general_operand} is very permissive, so it's hard to tell what 824an @code{indirect_operand} does or does not allow. If a target has 825different requirements for memory operands for different instructions, 826it is better to define target-specific predicates which enforce the 827hardware's requirements explicitly. 828@end defun 829 830@defun push_operand 831This predicate allows a memory reference suitable for pushing a value 832onto the stack. This will be a @code{MEM} which refers to 833@code{stack_pointer_rtx}, with a side-effect in its address expression 834(@pxref{Incdec}); which one is determined by the 835@code{STACK_PUSH_CODE} macro (@pxref{Frame Layout}). 836@end defun 837 838@defun pop_operand 839This predicate allows a memory reference suitable for popping a value 840off the stack. Again, this will be a @code{MEM} referring to 841@code{stack_pointer_rtx}, with a side-effect in its address 842expression. However, this time @code{STACK_POP_CODE} is expected. 843@end defun 844 845@noindent 846The fourth category of predicates allow some combination of the above 847operands. 848 849@defun nonmemory_operand 850This predicate allows any immediate or register operand valid for @var{mode}. 851@end defun 852 853@defun nonimmediate_operand 854This predicate allows any register or memory operand valid for @var{mode}. 855@end defun 856 857@defun general_operand 858This predicate allows any immediate, register, or memory operand 859valid for @var{mode}. 860@end defun 861 862@noindent 863Finally, there are two generic operator predicates. 864 865@defun comparison_operator 866This predicate matches any expression which performs an arithmetic 867comparison in @var{mode}; that is, @code{COMPARISON_P} is true for the 868expression code. 869@end defun 870 871@defun ordered_comparison_operator 872This predicate matches any expression which performs an arithmetic 873comparison in @var{mode} and whose expression code is valid for integer 874modes; that is, the expression code will be one of @code{eq}, @code{ne}, 875@code{lt}, @code{ltu}, @code{le}, @code{leu}, @code{gt}, @code{gtu}, 876@code{ge}, @code{geu}. 877@end defun 878 879@node Defining Predicates 880@subsection Defining Machine-Specific Predicates 881@cindex defining predicates 882@findex define_predicate 883@findex define_special_predicate 884 885Many machines have requirements for their operands that cannot be 886expressed precisely using the generic predicates. You can define 887additional predicates using @code{define_predicate} and 888@code{define_special_predicate} expressions. These expressions have 889three operands: 890 891@itemize @bullet 892@item 893The name of the predicate, as it will be referred to in 894@code{match_operand} or @code{match_operator} expressions. 895 896@item 897An RTL expression which evaluates to true if the predicate allows the 898operand @var{op}, false if it does not. This expression can only use 899the following RTL codes: 900 901@table @code 902@item MATCH_OPERAND 903When written inside a predicate expression, a @code{MATCH_OPERAND} 904expression evaluates to true if the predicate it names would allow 905@var{op}. The operand number and constraint are ignored. Due to 906limitations in @command{genrecog}, you can only refer to generic 907predicates and predicates that have already been defined. 908 909@item MATCH_CODE 910This expression evaluates to true if @var{op} or a specified 911subexpression of @var{op} has one of a given list of RTX codes. 912 913The first operand of this expression is a string constant containing a 914comma-separated list of RTX code names (in lower case). These are the 915codes for which the @code{MATCH_CODE} will be true. 916 917The second operand is a string constant which indicates what 918subexpression of @var{op} to examine. If it is absent or the empty 919string, @var{op} itself is examined. Otherwise, the string constant 920must be a sequence of digits and/or lowercase letters. Each character 921indicates a subexpression to extract from the current expression; for 922the first character this is @var{op}, for the second and subsequent 923characters it is the result of the previous character. A digit 924@var{n} extracts @samp{@w{XEXP (@var{e}, @var{n})}}; a letter @var{l} 925extracts @samp{@w{XVECEXP (@var{e}, 0, @var{n})}} where @var{n} is the 926alphabetic ordinal of @var{l} (0 for `a', 1 for 'b', and so on). The 927@code{MATCH_CODE} then examines the RTX code of the subexpression 928extracted by the complete string. It is not possible to extract 929components of an @code{rtvec} that is not at position 0 within its RTX 930object. 931 932@item MATCH_TEST 933This expression has one operand, a string constant containing a C 934expression. The predicate's arguments, @var{op} and @var{mode}, are 935available with those names in the C expression. The @code{MATCH_TEST} 936evaluates to true if the C expression evaluates to a nonzero value. 937@code{MATCH_TEST} expressions must not have side effects. 938 939@item AND 940@itemx IOR 941@itemx NOT 942@itemx IF_THEN_ELSE 943The basic @samp{MATCH_} expressions can be combined using these 944logical operators, which have the semantics of the C operators 945@samp{&&}, @samp{||}, @samp{!}, and @samp{@w{? :}} respectively. As 946in Common Lisp, you may give an @code{AND} or @code{IOR} expression an 947arbitrary number of arguments; this has exactly the same effect as 948writing a chain of two-argument @code{AND} or @code{IOR} expressions. 949@end table 950 951@item 952An optional block of C code, which should execute 953@samp{@w{return true}} if the predicate is found to match and 954@samp{@w{return false}} if it does not. It must not have any side 955effects. The predicate arguments, @var{op} and @var{mode}, are 956available with those names. 957 958If a code block is present in a predicate definition, then the RTL 959expression must evaluate to true @emph{and} the code block must 960execute @samp{@w{return true}} for the predicate to allow the operand. 961The RTL expression is evaluated first; do not re-check anything in the 962code block that was checked in the RTL expression. 963@end itemize 964 965The program @command{genrecog} scans @code{define_predicate} and 966@code{define_special_predicate} expressions to determine which RTX 967codes are possibly allowed. You should always make this explicit in 968the RTL predicate expression, using @code{MATCH_OPERAND} and 969@code{MATCH_CODE}. 970 971Here is an example of a simple predicate definition, from the IA64 972machine description: 973 974@smallexample 975@group 976;; @r{True if @var{op} is a @code{SYMBOL_REF} which refers to the sdata section.} 977(define_predicate "small_addr_symbolic_operand" 978 (and (match_code "symbol_ref") 979 (match_test "SYMBOL_REF_SMALL_ADDR_P (op)"))) 980@end group 981@end smallexample 982 983@noindent 984And here is another, showing the use of the C block. 985 986@smallexample 987@group 988;; @r{True if @var{op} is a register operand that is (or could be) a GR reg.} 989(define_predicate "gr_register_operand" 990 (match_operand 0 "register_operand") 991@{ 992 unsigned int regno; 993 if (GET_CODE (op) == SUBREG) 994 op = SUBREG_REG (op); 995 996 regno = REGNO (op); 997 return (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER || GENERAL_REGNO_P (regno)); 998@}) 999@end group 1000@end smallexample 1001 1002Predicates written with @code{define_predicate} automatically include 1003a test that @var{mode} is @code{VOIDmode}, or @var{op} has the same 1004mode as @var{mode}, or @var{op} is a @code{CONST_INT} or 1005@code{CONST_DOUBLE}. They do @emph{not} check specifically for 1006integer @code{CONST_DOUBLE}, nor do they test that the value of either 1007kind of constant fits in the requested mode. This is because 1008target-specific predicates that take constants usually have to do more 1009stringent value checks anyway. If you need the exact same treatment 1010of @code{CONST_INT} or @code{CONST_DOUBLE} that the generic predicates 1011provide, use a @code{MATCH_OPERAND} subexpression to call 1012@code{const_int_operand}, @code{const_double_operand}, or 1013@code{immediate_operand}. 1014 1015Predicates written with @code{define_special_predicate} do not get any 1016automatic mode checks, and are treated as having special mode handling 1017by @command{genrecog}. 1018 1019The program @command{genpreds} is responsible for generating code to 1020test predicates. It also writes a header file containing function 1021declarations for all machine-specific predicates. It is not necessary 1022to declare these predicates in @file{@var{cpu}-protos.h}. 1023@end ifset 1024 1025@c Most of this node appears by itself (in a different place) even 1026@c when the INTERNALS flag is clear. Passages that require the internals 1027@c manual's context are conditionalized to appear only in the internals manual. 1028@ifset INTERNALS 1029@node Constraints 1030@section Operand Constraints 1031@cindex operand constraints 1032@cindex constraints 1033 1034Each @code{match_operand} in an instruction pattern can specify 1035constraints for the operands allowed. The constraints allow you to 1036fine-tune matching within the set of operands allowed by the 1037predicate. 1038 1039@end ifset 1040@ifclear INTERNALS 1041@node Constraints 1042@section Constraints for @code{asm} Operands 1043@cindex operand constraints, @code{asm} 1044@cindex constraints, @code{asm} 1045@cindex @code{asm} constraints 1046 1047Here are specific details on what constraint letters you can use with 1048@code{asm} operands. 1049@end ifclear 1050Constraints can say whether 1051an operand may be in a register, and which kinds of register; whether the 1052operand can be a memory reference, and which kinds of address; whether the 1053operand may be an immediate constant, and which possible values it may 1054have. Constraints can also require two operands to match. 1055Side-effects aren't allowed in operands of inline @code{asm}, unless 1056@samp{<} or @samp{>} constraints are used, because there is no guarantee 1057that the side-effects will happen exactly once in an instruction that can update 1058the addressing register. 1059 1060@ifset INTERNALS 1061@menu 1062* Simple Constraints:: Basic use of constraints. 1063* Multi-Alternative:: When an insn has two alternative constraint-patterns. 1064* Class Preferences:: Constraints guide which hard register to put things in. 1065* Modifiers:: More precise control over effects of constraints. 1066* Disable Insn Alternatives:: Disable insn alternatives using the @code{enabled} attribute. 1067* Machine Constraints:: Existing constraints for some particular machines. 1068* Define Constraints:: How to define machine-specific constraints. 1069* C Constraint Interface:: How to test constraints from C code. 1070@end menu 1071@end ifset 1072 1073@ifclear INTERNALS 1074@menu 1075* Simple Constraints:: Basic use of constraints. 1076* Multi-Alternative:: When an insn has two alternative constraint-patterns. 1077* Modifiers:: More precise control over effects of constraints. 1078* Machine Constraints:: Special constraints for some particular machines. 1079@end menu 1080@end ifclear 1081 1082@node Simple Constraints 1083@subsection Simple Constraints 1084@cindex simple constraints 1085 1086The simplest kind of constraint is a string full of letters, each of 1087which describes one kind of operand that is permitted. Here are 1088the letters that are allowed: 1089 1090@table @asis 1091@item whitespace 1092Whitespace characters are ignored and can be inserted at any position 1093except the first. This enables each alternative for different operands to 1094be visually aligned in the machine description even if they have different 1095number of constraints and modifiers. 1096 1097@cindex @samp{m} in constraint 1098@cindex memory references in constraints 1099@item @samp{m} 1100A memory operand is allowed, with any kind of address that the machine 1101supports in general. 1102Note that the letter used for the general memory constraint can be 1103re-defined by a back end using the @code{TARGET_MEM_CONSTRAINT} macro. 1104 1105@cindex offsettable address 1106@cindex @samp{o} in constraint 1107@item @samp{o} 1108A memory operand is allowed, but only if the address is 1109@dfn{offsettable}. This means that adding a small integer (actually, 1110the width in bytes of the operand, as determined by its machine mode) 1111may be added to the address and the result is also a valid memory 1112address. 1113 1114@cindex autoincrement/decrement addressing 1115For example, an address which is constant is offsettable; so is an 1116address that is the sum of a register and a constant (as long as a 1117slightly larger constant is also within the range of address-offsets 1118supported by the machine); but an autoincrement or autodecrement 1119address is not offsettable. More complicated indirect/indexed 1120addresses may or may not be offsettable depending on the other 1121addressing modes that the machine supports. 1122 1123Note that in an output operand which can be matched by another 1124operand, the constraint letter @samp{o} is valid only when accompanied 1125by both @samp{<} (if the target machine has predecrement addressing) 1126and @samp{>} (if the target machine has preincrement addressing). 1127 1128@cindex @samp{V} in constraint 1129@item @samp{V} 1130A memory operand that is not offsettable. In other words, anything that 1131would fit the @samp{m} constraint but not the @samp{o} constraint. 1132 1133@cindex @samp{<} in constraint 1134@item @samp{<} 1135A memory operand with autodecrement addressing (either predecrement or 1136postdecrement) is allowed. In inline @code{asm} this constraint is only 1137allowed if the operand is used exactly once in an instruction that can 1138handle the side-effects. Not using an operand with @samp{<} in constraint 1139string in the inline @code{asm} pattern at all or using it in multiple 1140instructions isn't valid, because the side-effects wouldn't be performed 1141or would be performed more than once. Furthermore, on some targets 1142the operand with @samp{<} in constraint string must be accompanied by 1143special instruction suffixes like @code{%U0} instruction suffix on PowerPC 1144or @code{%P0} on IA-64. 1145 1146@cindex @samp{>} in constraint 1147@item @samp{>} 1148A memory operand with autoincrement addressing (either preincrement or 1149postincrement) is allowed. In inline @code{asm} the same restrictions 1150as for @samp{<} apply. 1151 1152@cindex @samp{r} in constraint 1153@cindex registers in constraints 1154@item @samp{r} 1155A register operand is allowed provided that it is in a general 1156register. 1157 1158@cindex constants in constraints 1159@cindex @samp{i} in constraint 1160@item @samp{i} 1161An immediate integer operand (one with constant value) is allowed. 1162This includes symbolic constants whose values will be known only at 1163assembly time or later. 1164 1165@cindex @samp{n} in constraint 1166@item @samp{n} 1167An immediate integer operand with a known numeric value is allowed. 1168Many systems cannot support assembly-time constants for operands less 1169than a word wide. Constraints for these operands should use @samp{n} 1170rather than @samp{i}. 1171 1172@cindex @samp{I} in constraint 1173@item @samp{I}, @samp{J}, @samp{K}, @dots{} @samp{P} 1174Other letters in the range @samp{I} through @samp{P} may be defined in 1175a machine-dependent fashion to permit immediate integer operands with 1176explicit integer values in specified ranges. For example, on the 117768000, @samp{I} is defined to stand for the range of values 1 to 8. 1178This is the range permitted as a shift count in the shift 1179instructions. 1180 1181@cindex @samp{E} in constraint 1182@item @samp{E} 1183An immediate floating operand (expression code @code{const_double}) is 1184allowed, but only if the target floating point format is the same as 1185that of the host machine (on which the compiler is running). 1186 1187@cindex @samp{F} in constraint 1188@item @samp{F} 1189An immediate floating operand (expression code @code{const_double} or 1190@code{const_vector}) is allowed. 1191 1192@cindex @samp{G} in constraint 1193@cindex @samp{H} in constraint 1194@item @samp{G}, @samp{H} 1195@samp{G} and @samp{H} may be defined in a machine-dependent fashion to 1196permit immediate floating operands in particular ranges of values. 1197 1198@cindex @samp{s} in constraint 1199@item @samp{s} 1200An immediate integer operand whose value is not an explicit integer is 1201allowed. 1202 1203This might appear strange; if an insn allows a constant operand with a 1204value not known at compile time, it certainly must allow any known 1205value. So why use @samp{s} instead of @samp{i}? Sometimes it allows 1206better code to be generated. 1207 1208For example, on the 68000 in a fullword instruction it is possible to 1209use an immediate operand; but if the immediate value is between @minus{}128 1210and 127, better code results from loading the value into a register and 1211using the register. This is because the load into the register can be 1212done with a @samp{moveq} instruction. We arrange for this to happen 1213by defining the letter @samp{K} to mean ``any integer outside the 1214range @minus{}128 to 127'', and then specifying @samp{Ks} in the operand 1215constraints. 1216 1217@cindex @samp{g} in constraint 1218@item @samp{g} 1219Any register, memory or immediate integer operand is allowed, except for 1220registers that are not general registers. 1221 1222@cindex @samp{X} in constraint 1223@item @samp{X} 1224@ifset INTERNALS 1225Any operand whatsoever is allowed, even if it does not satisfy 1226@code{general_operand}. This is normally used in the constraint of 1227a @code{match_scratch} when certain alternatives will not actually 1228require a scratch register. 1229@end ifset 1230@ifclear INTERNALS 1231Any operand whatsoever is allowed. 1232@end ifclear 1233 1234@cindex @samp{0} in constraint 1235@cindex digits in constraint 1236@item @samp{0}, @samp{1}, @samp{2}, @dots{} @samp{9} 1237An operand that matches the specified operand number is allowed. If a 1238digit is used together with letters within the same alternative, the 1239digit should come last. 1240 1241This number is allowed to be more than a single digit. If multiple 1242digits are encountered consecutively, they are interpreted as a single 1243decimal integer. There is scant chance for ambiguity, since to-date 1244it has never been desirable that @samp{10} be interpreted as matching 1245either operand 1 @emph{or} operand 0. Should this be desired, one 1246can use multiple alternatives instead. 1247 1248@cindex matching constraint 1249@cindex constraint, matching 1250This is called a @dfn{matching constraint} and what it really means is 1251that the assembler has only a single operand that fills two roles 1252@ifset INTERNALS 1253considered separate in the RTL insn. For example, an add insn has two 1254input operands and one output operand in the RTL, but on most CISC 1255@end ifset 1256@ifclear INTERNALS 1257which @code{asm} distinguishes. For example, an add instruction uses 1258two input operands and an output operand, but on most CISC 1259@end ifclear 1260machines an add instruction really has only two operands, one of them an 1261input-output operand: 1262 1263@smallexample 1264addl #35,r12 1265@end smallexample 1266 1267Matching constraints are used in these circumstances. 1268More precisely, the two operands that match must include one input-only 1269operand and one output-only operand. Moreover, the digit must be a 1270smaller number than the number of the operand that uses it in the 1271constraint. 1272 1273@ifset INTERNALS 1274For operands to match in a particular case usually means that they 1275are identical-looking RTL expressions. But in a few special cases 1276specific kinds of dissimilarity are allowed. For example, @code{*x} 1277as an input operand will match @code{*x++} as an output operand. 1278For proper results in such cases, the output template should always 1279use the output-operand's number when printing the operand. 1280@end ifset 1281 1282@cindex load address instruction 1283@cindex push address instruction 1284@cindex address constraints 1285@cindex @samp{p} in constraint 1286@item @samp{p} 1287An operand that is a valid memory address is allowed. This is 1288for ``load address'' and ``push address'' instructions. 1289 1290@findex address_operand 1291@samp{p} in the constraint must be accompanied by @code{address_operand} 1292as the predicate in the @code{match_operand}. This predicate interprets 1293the mode specified in the @code{match_operand} as the mode of the memory 1294reference for which the address would be valid. 1295 1296@cindex other register constraints 1297@cindex extensible constraints 1298@item @var{other-letters} 1299Other letters can be defined in machine-dependent fashion to stand for 1300particular classes of registers or other arbitrary operand types. 1301@samp{d}, @samp{a} and @samp{f} are defined on the 68000/68020 to stand 1302for data, address and floating point registers. 1303@end table 1304 1305@ifset INTERNALS 1306In order to have valid assembler code, each operand must satisfy 1307its constraint. But a failure to do so does not prevent the pattern 1308from applying to an insn. Instead, it directs the compiler to modify 1309the code so that the constraint will be satisfied. Usually this is 1310done by copying an operand into a register. 1311 1312Contrast, therefore, the two instruction patterns that follow: 1313 1314@smallexample 1315(define_insn "" 1316 [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r") 1317 (plus:SI (match_dup 0) 1318 (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "r")))] 1319 "" 1320 "@dots{}") 1321@end smallexample 1322 1323@noindent 1324which has two operands, one of which must appear in two places, and 1325 1326@smallexample 1327(define_insn "" 1328 [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r") 1329 (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "0") 1330 (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "r")))] 1331 "" 1332 "@dots{}") 1333@end smallexample 1334 1335@noindent 1336which has three operands, two of which are required by a constraint to be 1337identical. If we are considering an insn of the form 1338 1339@smallexample 1340(insn @var{n} @var{prev} @var{next} 1341 (set (reg:SI 3) 1342 (plus:SI (reg:SI 6) (reg:SI 109))) 1343 @dots{}) 1344@end smallexample 1345 1346@noindent 1347the first pattern would not apply at all, because this insn does not 1348contain two identical subexpressions in the right place. The pattern would 1349say, ``That does not look like an add instruction; try other patterns''. 1350The second pattern would say, ``Yes, that's an add instruction, but there 1351is something wrong with it''. It would direct the reload pass of the 1352compiler to generate additional insns to make the constraint true. The 1353results might look like this: 1354 1355@smallexample 1356(insn @var{n2} @var{prev} @var{n} 1357 (set (reg:SI 3) (reg:SI 6)) 1358 @dots{}) 1359 1360(insn @var{n} @var{n2} @var{next} 1361 (set (reg:SI 3) 1362 (plus:SI (reg:SI 3) (reg:SI 109))) 1363 @dots{}) 1364@end smallexample 1365 1366It is up to you to make sure that each operand, in each pattern, has 1367constraints that can handle any RTL expression that could be present for 1368that operand. (When multiple alternatives are in use, each pattern must, 1369for each possible combination of operand expressions, have at least one 1370alternative which can handle that combination of operands.) The 1371constraints don't need to @emph{allow} any possible operand---when this is 1372the case, they do not constrain---but they must at least point the way to 1373reloading any possible operand so that it will fit. 1374 1375@itemize @bullet 1376@item 1377If the constraint accepts whatever operands the predicate permits, 1378there is no problem: reloading is never necessary for this operand. 1379 1380For example, an operand whose constraints permit everything except 1381registers is safe provided its predicate rejects registers. 1382 1383An operand whose predicate accepts only constant values is safe 1384provided its constraints include the letter @samp{i}. If any possible 1385constant value is accepted, then nothing less than @samp{i} will do; 1386if the predicate is more selective, then the constraints may also be 1387more selective. 1388 1389@item 1390Any operand expression can be reloaded by copying it into a register. 1391So if an operand's constraints allow some kind of register, it is 1392certain to be safe. It need not permit all classes of registers; the 1393compiler knows how to copy a register into another register of the 1394proper class in order to make an instruction valid. 1395 1396@cindex nonoffsettable memory reference 1397@cindex memory reference, nonoffsettable 1398@item 1399A nonoffsettable memory reference can be reloaded by copying the 1400address into a register. So if the constraint uses the letter 1401@samp{o}, all memory references are taken care of. 1402 1403@item 1404A constant operand can be reloaded by allocating space in memory to 1405hold it as preinitialized data. Then the memory reference can be used 1406in place of the constant. So if the constraint uses the letters 1407@samp{o} or @samp{m}, constant operands are not a problem. 1408 1409@item 1410If the constraint permits a constant and a pseudo register used in an insn 1411was not allocated to a hard register and is equivalent to a constant, 1412the register will be replaced with the constant. If the predicate does 1413not permit a constant and the insn is re-recognized for some reason, the 1414compiler will crash. Thus the predicate must always recognize any 1415objects allowed by the constraint. 1416@end itemize 1417 1418If the operand's predicate can recognize registers, but the constraint does 1419not permit them, it can make the compiler crash. When this operand happens 1420to be a register, the reload pass will be stymied, because it does not know 1421how to copy a register temporarily into memory. 1422 1423If the predicate accepts a unary operator, the constraint applies to the 1424operand. For example, the MIPS processor at ISA level 3 supports an 1425instruction which adds two registers in @code{SImode} to produce a 1426@code{DImode} result, but only if the registers are correctly sign 1427extended. This predicate for the input operands accepts a 1428@code{sign_extend} of an @code{SImode} register. Write the constraint 1429to indicate the type of register that is required for the operand of the 1430@code{sign_extend}. 1431@end ifset 1432 1433@node Multi-Alternative 1434@subsection Multiple Alternative Constraints 1435@cindex multiple alternative constraints 1436 1437Sometimes a single instruction has multiple alternative sets of possible 1438operands. For example, on the 68000, a logical-or instruction can combine 1439register or an immediate value into memory, or it can combine any kind of 1440operand into a register; but it cannot combine one memory location into 1441another. 1442 1443These constraints are represented as multiple alternatives. An alternative 1444can be described by a series of letters for each operand. The overall 1445constraint for an operand is made from the letters for this operand 1446from the first alternative, a comma, the letters for this operand from 1447the second alternative, a comma, and so on until the last alternative. 1448@ifset INTERNALS 1449Here is how it is done for fullword logical-or on the 68000: 1450 1451@smallexample 1452(define_insn "iorsi3" 1453 [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=m,d") 1454 (ior:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "%0,0") 1455 (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "dKs,dmKs")))] 1456 @dots{}) 1457@end smallexample 1458 1459The first alternative has @samp{m} (memory) for operand 0, @samp{0} for 1460operand 1 (meaning it must match operand 0), and @samp{dKs} for operand 14612. The second alternative has @samp{d} (data register) for operand 0, 1462@samp{0} for operand 1, and @samp{dmKs} for operand 2. The @samp{=} and 1463@samp{%} in the constraints apply to all the alternatives; their 1464meaning is explained in the next section (@pxref{Class Preferences}). 1465@end ifset 1466 1467@c FIXME Is this ? and ! stuff of use in asm()? If not, hide unless INTERNAL 1468If all the operands fit any one alternative, the instruction is valid. 1469Otherwise, for each alternative, the compiler counts how many instructions 1470must be added to copy the operands so that that alternative applies. 1471The alternative requiring the least copying is chosen. If two alternatives 1472need the same amount of copying, the one that comes first is chosen. 1473These choices can be altered with the @samp{?} and @samp{!} characters: 1474 1475@table @code 1476@cindex @samp{?} in constraint 1477@cindex question mark 1478@item ? 1479Disparage slightly the alternative that the @samp{?} appears in, 1480as a choice when no alternative applies exactly. The compiler regards 1481this alternative as one unit more costly for each @samp{?} that appears 1482in it. 1483 1484@cindex @samp{!} in constraint 1485@cindex exclamation point 1486@item ! 1487Disparage severely the alternative that the @samp{!} appears in. 1488This alternative can still be used if it fits without reloading, 1489but if reloading is needed, some other alternative will be used. 1490@end table 1491 1492@ifset INTERNALS 1493When an insn pattern has multiple alternatives in its constraints, often 1494the appearance of the assembler code is determined mostly by which 1495alternative was matched. When this is so, the C code for writing the 1496assembler code can use the variable @code{which_alternative}, which is 1497the ordinal number of the alternative that was actually satisfied (0 for 1498the first, 1 for the second alternative, etc.). @xref{Output Statement}. 1499@end ifset 1500 1501@ifset INTERNALS 1502@node Class Preferences 1503@subsection Register Class Preferences 1504@cindex class preference constraints 1505@cindex register class preference constraints 1506 1507@cindex voting between constraint alternatives 1508The operand constraints have another function: they enable the compiler 1509to decide which kind of hardware register a pseudo register is best 1510allocated to. The compiler examines the constraints that apply to the 1511insns that use the pseudo register, looking for the machine-dependent 1512letters such as @samp{d} and @samp{a} that specify classes of registers. 1513The pseudo register is put in whichever class gets the most ``votes''. 1514The constraint letters @samp{g} and @samp{r} also vote: they vote in 1515favor of a general register. The machine description says which registers 1516are considered general. 1517 1518Of course, on some machines all registers are equivalent, and no register 1519classes are defined. Then none of this complexity is relevant. 1520@end ifset 1521 1522@node Modifiers 1523@subsection Constraint Modifier Characters 1524@cindex modifiers in constraints 1525@cindex constraint modifier characters 1526 1527@c prevent bad page break with this line 1528Here are constraint modifier characters. 1529 1530@table @samp 1531@cindex @samp{=} in constraint 1532@item = 1533Means that this operand is write-only for this instruction: the previous 1534value is discarded and replaced by output data. 1535 1536@cindex @samp{+} in constraint 1537@item + 1538Means that this operand is both read and written by the instruction. 1539 1540When the compiler fixes up the operands to satisfy the constraints, 1541it needs to know which operands are inputs to the instruction and 1542which are outputs from it. @samp{=} identifies an output; @samp{+} 1543identifies an operand that is both input and output; all other operands 1544are assumed to be input only. 1545 1546If you specify @samp{=} or @samp{+} in a constraint, you put it in the 1547first character of the constraint string. 1548 1549@cindex @samp{&} in constraint 1550@cindex earlyclobber operand 1551@item & 1552Means (in a particular alternative) that this operand is an 1553@dfn{earlyclobber} operand, which is modified before the instruction is 1554finished using the input operands. Therefore, this operand may not lie 1555in a register that is used as an input operand or as part of any memory 1556address. 1557 1558@samp{&} applies only to the alternative in which it is written. In 1559constraints with multiple alternatives, sometimes one alternative 1560requires @samp{&} while others do not. See, for example, the 1561@samp{movdf} insn of the 68000. 1562 1563An input operand can be tied to an earlyclobber operand if its only 1564use as an input occurs before the early result is written. Adding 1565alternatives of this form often allows GCC to produce better code 1566when only some of the inputs can be affected by the earlyclobber. 1567See, for example, the @samp{mulsi3} insn of the ARM@. 1568 1569@samp{&} does not obviate the need to write @samp{=}. 1570 1571@cindex @samp{%} in constraint 1572@item % 1573Declares the instruction to be commutative for this operand and the 1574following operand. This means that the compiler may interchange the 1575two operands if that is the cheapest way to make all operands fit the 1576constraints. 1577@ifset INTERNALS 1578This is often used in patterns for addition instructions 1579that really have only two operands: the result must go in one of the 1580arguments. Here for example, is how the 68000 halfword-add 1581instruction is defined: 1582 1583@smallexample 1584(define_insn "addhi3" 1585 [(set (match_operand:HI 0 "general_operand" "=m,r") 1586 (plus:HI (match_operand:HI 1 "general_operand" "%0,0") 1587 (match_operand:HI 2 "general_operand" "di,g")))] 1588 @dots{}) 1589@end smallexample 1590@end ifset 1591GCC can only handle one commutative pair in an asm; if you use more, 1592the compiler may fail. Note that you need not use the modifier if 1593the two alternatives are strictly identical; this would only waste 1594time in the reload pass. The modifier is not operational after 1595register allocation, so the result of @code{define_peephole2} 1596and @code{define_split}s performed after reload cannot rely on 1597@samp{%} to make the intended insn match. 1598 1599@cindex @samp{#} in constraint 1600@item # 1601Says that all following characters, up to the next comma, are to be 1602ignored as a constraint. They are significant only for choosing 1603register preferences. 1604 1605@cindex @samp{*} in constraint 1606@item * 1607Says that the following character should be ignored when choosing 1608register preferences. @samp{*} has no effect on the meaning of the 1609constraint as a constraint, and no effect on reloading. 1610 1611@ifset INTERNALS 1612Here is an example: the 68000 has an instruction to sign-extend a 1613halfword in a data register, and can also sign-extend a value by 1614copying it into an address register. While either kind of register is 1615acceptable, the constraints on an address-register destination are 1616less strict, so it is best if register allocation makes an address 1617register its goal. Therefore, @samp{*} is used so that the @samp{d} 1618constraint letter (for data register) is ignored when computing 1619register preferences. 1620 1621@smallexample 1622(define_insn "extendhisi2" 1623 [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=*d,a") 1624 (sign_extend:SI 1625 (match_operand:HI 1 "general_operand" "0,g")))] 1626 @dots{}) 1627@end smallexample 1628@end ifset 1629@end table 1630 1631@node Machine Constraints 1632@subsection Constraints for Particular Machines 1633@cindex machine specific constraints 1634@cindex constraints, machine specific 1635 1636Whenever possible, you should use the general-purpose constraint letters 1637in @code{asm} arguments, since they will convey meaning more readily to 1638people reading your code. Failing that, use the constraint letters 1639that usually have very similar meanings across architectures. The most 1640commonly used constraints are @samp{m} and @samp{r} (for memory and 1641general-purpose registers respectively; @pxref{Simple Constraints}), and 1642@samp{I}, usually the letter indicating the most common 1643immediate-constant format. 1644 1645Each architecture defines additional constraints. These constraints 1646are used by the compiler itself for instruction generation, as well as 1647for @code{asm} statements; therefore, some of the constraints are not 1648particularly useful for @code{asm}. Here is a summary of some of the 1649machine-dependent constraints available on some particular machines; 1650it includes both constraints that are useful for @code{asm} and 1651constraints that aren't. The compiler source file mentioned in the 1652table heading for each architecture is the definitive reference for 1653the meanings of that architecture's constraints. 1654 1655@table @emph 1656@item ARM family---@file{config/arm/arm.h} 1657@table @code 1658@item f 1659Floating-point register 1660 1661@item w 1662VFP floating-point register 1663 1664@item F 1665One of the floating-point constants 0.0, 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0 1666or 10.0 1667 1668@item G 1669Floating-point constant that would satisfy the constraint @samp{F} if it 1670were negated 1671 1672@item I 1673Integer that is valid as an immediate operand in a data processing 1674instruction. That is, an integer in the range 0 to 255 rotated by a 1675multiple of 2 1676 1677@item J 1678Integer in the range @minus{}4095 to 4095 1679 1680@item K 1681Integer that satisfies constraint @samp{I} when inverted (ones complement) 1682 1683@item L 1684Integer that satisfies constraint @samp{I} when negated (twos complement) 1685 1686@item M 1687Integer in the range 0 to 32 1688 1689@item Q 1690A memory reference where the exact address is in a single register 1691(`@samp{m}' is preferable for @code{asm} statements) 1692 1693@item R 1694An item in the constant pool 1695 1696@item S 1697A symbol in the text segment of the current file 1698 1699@item Uv 1700A memory reference suitable for VFP load/store insns (reg+constant offset) 1701 1702@item Uy 1703A memory reference suitable for iWMMXt load/store instructions. 1704 1705@item Uq 1706A memory reference suitable for the ARMv4 ldrsb instruction. 1707@end table 1708 1709@item AVR family---@file{config/avr/constraints.md} 1710@table @code 1711@item l 1712Registers from r0 to r15 1713 1714@item a 1715Registers from r16 to r23 1716 1717@item d 1718Registers from r16 to r31 1719 1720@item w 1721Registers from r24 to r31. These registers can be used in @samp{adiw} command 1722 1723@item e 1724Pointer register (r26--r31) 1725 1726@item b 1727Base pointer register (r28--r31) 1728 1729@item q 1730Stack pointer register (SPH:SPL) 1731 1732@item t 1733Temporary register r0 1734 1735@item x 1736Register pair X (r27:r26) 1737 1738@item y 1739Register pair Y (r29:r28) 1740 1741@item z 1742Register pair Z (r31:r30) 1743 1744@item I 1745Constant greater than @minus{}1, less than 64 1746 1747@item J 1748Constant greater than @minus{}64, less than 1 1749 1750@item K 1751Constant integer 2 1752 1753@item L 1754Constant integer 0 1755 1756@item M 1757Constant that fits in 8 bits 1758 1759@item N 1760Constant integer @minus{}1 1761 1762@item O 1763Constant integer 8, 16, or 24 1764 1765@item P 1766Constant integer 1 1767 1768@item G 1769A floating point constant 0.0 1770 1771@item Q 1772A memory address based on Y or Z pointer with displacement. 1773@end table 1774 1775@item Epiphany---@file{config/epiphany/constraints.md} 1776@table @code 1777@item U16 1778An unsigned 16-bit constant. 1779 1780@item K 1781An unsigned 5-bit constant. 1782 1783@item L 1784A signed 11-bit constant. 1785 1786@item Cm1 1787A signed 11-bit constant added to @minus{}1. 1788Can only match when the @option{-m1reg-@var{reg}} option is active. 1789 1790@item Cl1 1791Left-shift of @minus{}1, i.e., a bit mask with a block of leading ones, the rest 1792being a block of trailing zeroes. 1793Can only match when the @option{-m1reg-@var{reg}} option is active. 1794 1795@item Cr1 1796Right-shift of @minus{}1, i.e., a bit mask with a trailing block of ones, the 1797rest being zeroes. Or to put it another way, one less than a power of two. 1798Can only match when the @option{-m1reg-@var{reg}} option is active. 1799 1800@item Cal 1801Constant for arithmetic/logical operations. 1802This is like @code{i}, except that for position independent code, 1803no symbols / expressions needing relocations are allowed. 1804 1805@item Csy 1806Symbolic constant for call/jump instruction. 1807 1808@item Rcs 1809The register class usable in short insns. This is a register class 1810constraint, and can thus drive register allocation. 1811This constraint won't match unless @option{-mprefer-short-insn-regs} is 1812in effect. 1813 1814@item Rsc 1815The the register class of registers that can be used to hold a 1816sibcall call address. I.e., a caller-saved register. 1817 1818@item Rct 1819Core control register class. 1820 1821@item Rgs 1822The register group usable in short insns. 1823This constraint does not use a register class, so that it only 1824passively matches suitable registers, and doesn't drive register allocation. 1825 1826@ifset INTERNALS 1827@item Car 1828Constant suitable for the addsi3_r pattern. This is a valid offset 1829For byte, halfword, or word addressing. 1830@end ifset 1831 1832@item Rra 1833Matches the return address if it can be replaced with the link register. 1834 1835@item Rcc 1836Matches the integer condition code register. 1837 1838@item Sra 1839Matches the return address if it is in a stack slot. 1840 1841@item Cfm 1842Matches control register values to switch fp mode, which are encapsulated in 1843@code{UNSPEC_FP_MODE}. 1844@end table 1845 1846@item CR16 Architecture---@file{config/cr16/cr16.h} 1847@table @code 1848 1849@item b 1850Registers from r0 to r14 (registers without stack pointer) 1851 1852@item t 1853Register from r0 to r11 (all 16-bit registers) 1854 1855@item p 1856Register from r12 to r15 (all 32-bit registers) 1857 1858@item I 1859Signed constant that fits in 4 bits 1860 1861@item J 1862Signed constant that fits in 5 bits 1863 1864@item K 1865Signed constant that fits in 6 bits 1866 1867@item L 1868Unsigned constant that fits in 4 bits 1869 1870@item M 1871Signed constant that fits in 32 bits 1872 1873@item N 1874Check for 64 bits wide constants for add/sub instructions 1875 1876@item G 1877Floating point constant that is legal for store immediate 1878@end table 1879 1880@item Hewlett-Packard PA-RISC---@file{config/pa/pa.h} 1881@table @code 1882@item a 1883General register 1 1884 1885@item f 1886Floating point register 1887 1888@item q 1889Shift amount register 1890 1891@item x 1892Floating point register (deprecated) 1893 1894@item y 1895Upper floating point register (32-bit), floating point register (64-bit) 1896 1897@item Z 1898Any register 1899 1900@item I 1901Signed 11-bit integer constant 1902 1903@item J 1904Signed 14-bit integer constant 1905 1906@item K 1907Integer constant that can be deposited with a @code{zdepi} instruction 1908 1909@item L 1910Signed 5-bit integer constant 1911 1912@item M 1913Integer constant 0 1914 1915@item N 1916Integer constant that can be loaded with a @code{ldil} instruction 1917 1918@item O 1919Integer constant whose value plus one is a power of 2 1920 1921@item P 1922Integer constant that can be used for @code{and} operations in @code{depi} 1923and @code{extru} instructions 1924 1925@item S 1926Integer constant 31 1927 1928@item U 1929Integer constant 63 1930 1931@item G 1932Floating-point constant 0.0 1933 1934@item A 1935A @code{lo_sum} data-linkage-table memory operand 1936 1937@item Q 1938A memory operand that can be used as the destination operand of an 1939integer store instruction 1940 1941@item R 1942A scaled or unscaled indexed memory operand 1943 1944@item T 1945A memory operand for floating-point loads and stores 1946 1947@item W 1948A register indirect memory operand 1949@end table 1950 1951@item picoChip family---@file{picochip.h} 1952@table @code 1953@item k 1954Stack register. 1955 1956@item f 1957Pointer register. A register which can be used to access memory without 1958supplying an offset. Any other register can be used to access memory, 1959but will need a constant offset. In the case of the offset being zero, 1960it is more efficient to use a pointer register, since this reduces code 1961size. 1962 1963@item t 1964A twin register. A register which may be paired with an adjacent 1965register to create a 32-bit register. 1966 1967@item a 1968Any absolute memory address (e.g., symbolic constant, symbolic 1969constant + offset). 1970 1971@item I 19724-bit signed integer. 1973 1974@item J 19754-bit unsigned integer. 1976 1977@item K 19788-bit signed integer. 1979 1980@item M 1981Any constant whose absolute value is no greater than 4-bits. 1982 1983@item N 198410-bit signed integer 1985 1986@item O 198716-bit signed integer. 1988 1989@end table 1990 1991@item PowerPC and IBM RS6000---@file{config/rs6000/rs6000.h} 1992@table @code 1993@item b 1994Address base register 1995 1996@item d 1997Floating point register (containing 64-bit value) 1998 1999@item f 2000Floating point register (containing 32-bit value) 2001 2002@item v 2003Altivec vector register 2004 2005@item wd 2006VSX vector register to hold vector double data 2007 2008@item wf 2009VSX vector register to hold vector float data 2010 2011@item ws 2012VSX vector register to hold scalar float data 2013 2014@item wa 2015Any VSX register 2016 2017@item h 2018@samp{MQ}, @samp{CTR}, or @samp{LINK} register 2019 2020@item q 2021@samp{MQ} register 2022 2023@item c 2024@samp{CTR} register 2025 2026@item l 2027@samp{LINK} register 2028 2029@item x 2030@samp{CR} register (condition register) number 0 2031 2032@item y 2033@samp{CR} register (condition register) 2034 2035@item z 2036@samp{XER[CA]} carry bit (part of the XER register) 2037 2038@item I 2039Signed 16-bit constant 2040 2041@item J 2042Unsigned 16-bit constant shifted left 16 bits (use @samp{L} instead for 2043@code{SImode} constants) 2044 2045@item K 2046Unsigned 16-bit constant 2047 2048@item L 2049Signed 16-bit constant shifted left 16 bits 2050 2051@item M 2052Constant larger than 31 2053 2054@item N 2055Exact power of 2 2056 2057@item O 2058Zero 2059 2060@item P 2061Constant whose negation is a signed 16-bit constant 2062 2063@item G 2064Floating point constant that can be loaded into a register with one 2065instruction per word 2066 2067@item H 2068Integer/Floating point constant that can be loaded into a register using 2069three instructions 2070 2071@item m 2072Memory operand. 2073Normally, @code{m} does not allow addresses that update the base register. 2074If @samp{<} or @samp{>} constraint is also used, they are allowed and 2075therefore on PowerPC targets in that case it is only safe 2076to use @samp{m<>} in an @code{asm} statement if that @code{asm} statement 2077accesses the operand exactly once. The @code{asm} statement must also 2078use @samp{%U@var{<opno>}} as a placeholder for the ``update'' flag in the 2079corresponding load or store instruction. For example: 2080 2081@smallexample 2082asm ("st%U0 %1,%0" : "=m<>" (mem) : "r" (val)); 2083@end smallexample 2084 2085is correct but: 2086 2087@smallexample 2088asm ("st %1,%0" : "=m<>" (mem) : "r" (val)); 2089@end smallexample 2090 2091is not. 2092 2093@item es 2094A ``stable'' memory operand; that is, one which does not include any 2095automodification of the base register. This used to be useful when 2096@samp{m} allowed automodification of the base register, but as those are now only 2097allowed when @samp{<} or @samp{>} is used, @samp{es} is basically the same 2098as @samp{m} without @samp{<} and @samp{>}. 2099 2100@item Q 2101Memory operand that is an offset from a register (it is usually better 2102to use @samp{m} or @samp{es} in @code{asm} statements) 2103 2104@item Z 2105Memory operand that is an indexed or indirect from a register (it is 2106usually better to use @samp{m} or @samp{es} in @code{asm} statements) 2107 2108@item R 2109AIX TOC entry 2110 2111@item a 2112Address operand that is an indexed or indirect from a register (@samp{p} is 2113preferable for @code{asm} statements) 2114 2115@item S 2116Constant suitable as a 64-bit mask operand 2117 2118@item T 2119Constant suitable as a 32-bit mask operand 2120 2121@item U 2122System V Release 4 small data area reference 2123 2124@item t 2125AND masks that can be performed by two rldic@{l, r@} instructions 2126 2127@item W 2128Vector constant that does not require memory 2129 2130@item j 2131Vector constant that is all zeros. 2132 2133@end table 2134 2135@item Intel 386---@file{config/i386/constraints.md} 2136@table @code 2137@item R 2138Legacy register---the eight integer registers available on all 2139i386 processors (@code{a}, @code{b}, @code{c}, @code{d}, 2140@code{si}, @code{di}, @code{bp}, @code{sp}). 2141 2142@item q 2143Any register accessible as @code{@var{r}l}. In 32-bit mode, @code{a}, 2144@code{b}, @code{c}, and @code{d}; in 64-bit mode, any integer register. 2145 2146@item Q 2147Any register accessible as @code{@var{r}h}: @code{a}, @code{b}, 2148@code{c}, and @code{d}. 2149 2150@ifset INTERNALS 2151@item l 2152Any register that can be used as the index in a base+index memory 2153access: that is, any general register except the stack pointer. 2154@end ifset 2155 2156@item a 2157The @code{a} register. 2158 2159@item b 2160The @code{b} register. 2161 2162@item c 2163The @code{c} register. 2164 2165@item d 2166The @code{d} register. 2167 2168@item S 2169The @code{si} register. 2170 2171@item D 2172The @code{di} register. 2173 2174@item A 2175The @code{a} and @code{d} registers. This class is used for instructions 2176that return double word results in the @code{ax:dx} register pair. Single 2177word values will be allocated either in @code{ax} or @code{dx}. 2178For example on i386 the following implements @code{rdtsc}: 2179 2180@smallexample 2181unsigned long long rdtsc (void) 2182@{ 2183 unsigned long long tick; 2184 __asm__ __volatile__("rdtsc":"=A"(tick)); 2185 return tick; 2186@} 2187@end smallexample 2188 2189This is not correct on x86_64 as it would allocate tick in either @code{ax} 2190or @code{dx}. You have to use the following variant instead: 2191 2192@smallexample 2193unsigned long long rdtsc (void) 2194@{ 2195 unsigned int tickl, tickh; 2196 __asm__ __volatile__("rdtsc":"=a"(tickl),"=d"(tickh)); 2197 return ((unsigned long long)tickh << 32)|tickl; 2198@} 2199@end smallexample 2200 2201 2202@item f 2203Any 80387 floating-point (stack) register. 2204 2205@item t 2206Top of 80387 floating-point stack (@code{%st(0)}). 2207 2208@item u 2209Second from top of 80387 floating-point stack (@code{%st(1)}). 2210 2211@item y 2212Any MMX register. 2213 2214@item x 2215Any SSE register. 2216 2217@item Yz 2218First SSE register (@code{%xmm0}). 2219 2220@ifset INTERNALS 2221@item Y2 2222Any SSE register, when SSE2 is enabled. 2223 2224@item Yi 2225Any SSE register, when SSE2 and inter-unit moves are enabled. 2226 2227@item Ym 2228Any MMX register, when inter-unit moves are enabled. 2229@end ifset 2230 2231@item I 2232Integer constant in the range 0 @dots{} 31, for 32-bit shifts. 2233 2234@item J 2235Integer constant in the range 0 @dots{} 63, for 64-bit shifts. 2236 2237@item K 2238Signed 8-bit integer constant. 2239 2240@item L 2241@code{0xFF} or @code{0xFFFF}, for andsi as a zero-extending move. 2242 2243@item M 22440, 1, 2, or 3 (shifts for the @code{lea} instruction). 2245 2246@item N 2247Unsigned 8-bit integer constant (for @code{in} and @code{out} 2248instructions). 2249 2250@ifset INTERNALS 2251@item O 2252Integer constant in the range 0 @dots{} 127, for 128-bit shifts. 2253@end ifset 2254 2255@item G 2256Standard 80387 floating point constant. 2257 2258@item C 2259Standard SSE floating point constant. 2260 2261@item e 226232-bit signed integer constant, or a symbolic reference known 2263to fit that range (for immediate operands in sign-extending x86-64 2264instructions). 2265 2266@item Z 226732-bit unsigned integer constant, or a symbolic reference known 2268to fit that range (for immediate operands in zero-extending x86-64 2269instructions). 2270 2271@end table 2272 2273@item Intel IA-64---@file{config/ia64/ia64.h} 2274@table @code 2275@item a 2276General register @code{r0} to @code{r3} for @code{addl} instruction 2277 2278@item b 2279Branch register 2280 2281@item c 2282Predicate register (@samp{c} as in ``conditional'') 2283 2284@item d 2285Application register residing in M-unit 2286 2287@item e 2288Application register residing in I-unit 2289 2290@item f 2291Floating-point register 2292 2293@item m 2294Memory operand. If used together with @samp{<} or @samp{>}, 2295the operand can have postincrement and postdecrement which 2296require printing with @samp{%Pn} on IA-64. 2297 2298@item G 2299Floating-point constant 0.0 or 1.0 2300 2301@item I 230214-bit signed integer constant 2303 2304@item J 230522-bit signed integer constant 2306 2307@item K 23088-bit signed integer constant for logical instructions 2309 2310@item L 23118-bit adjusted signed integer constant for compare pseudo-ops 2312 2313@item M 23146-bit unsigned integer constant for shift counts 2315 2316@item N 23179-bit signed integer constant for load and store postincrements 2318 2319@item O 2320The constant zero 2321 2322@item P 23230 or @minus{}1 for @code{dep} instruction 2324 2325@item Q 2326Non-volatile memory for floating-point loads and stores 2327 2328@item R 2329Integer constant in the range 1 to 4 for @code{shladd} instruction 2330 2331@item S 2332Memory operand except postincrement and postdecrement. This is 2333now roughly the same as @samp{m} when not used together with @samp{<} 2334or @samp{>}. 2335@end table 2336 2337@item FRV---@file{config/frv/frv.h} 2338@table @code 2339@item a 2340Register in the class @code{ACC_REGS} (@code{acc0} to @code{acc7}). 2341 2342@item b 2343Register in the class @code{EVEN_ACC_REGS} (@code{acc0} to @code{acc7}). 2344 2345@item c 2346Register in the class @code{CC_REGS} (@code{fcc0} to @code{fcc3} and 2347@code{icc0} to @code{icc3}). 2348 2349@item d 2350Register in the class @code{GPR_REGS} (@code{gr0} to @code{gr63}). 2351 2352@item e 2353Register in the class @code{EVEN_REGS} (@code{gr0} to @code{gr63}). 2354Odd registers are excluded not in the class but through the use of a machine 2355mode larger than 4 bytes. 2356 2357@item f 2358Register in the class @code{FPR_REGS} (@code{fr0} to @code{fr63}). 2359 2360@item h 2361Register in the class @code{FEVEN_REGS} (@code{fr0} to @code{fr63}). 2362Odd registers are excluded not in the class but through the use of a machine 2363mode larger than 4 bytes. 2364 2365@item l 2366Register in the class @code{LR_REG} (the @code{lr} register). 2367 2368@item q 2369Register in the class @code{QUAD_REGS} (@code{gr2} to @code{gr63}). 2370Register numbers not divisible by 4 are excluded not in the class but through 2371the use of a machine mode larger than 8 bytes. 2372 2373@item t 2374Register in the class @code{ICC_REGS} (@code{icc0} to @code{icc3}). 2375 2376@item u 2377Register in the class @code{FCC_REGS} (@code{fcc0} to @code{fcc3}). 2378 2379@item v 2380Register in the class @code{ICR_REGS} (@code{cc4} to @code{cc7}). 2381 2382@item w 2383Register in the class @code{FCR_REGS} (@code{cc0} to @code{cc3}). 2384 2385@item x 2386Register in the class @code{QUAD_FPR_REGS} (@code{fr0} to @code{fr63}). 2387Register numbers not divisible by 4 are excluded not in the class but through 2388the use of a machine mode larger than 8 bytes. 2389 2390@item z 2391Register in the class @code{SPR_REGS} (@code{lcr} and @code{lr}). 2392 2393@item A 2394Register in the class @code{QUAD_ACC_REGS} (@code{acc0} to @code{acc7}). 2395 2396@item B 2397Register in the class @code{ACCG_REGS} (@code{accg0} to @code{accg7}). 2398 2399@item C 2400Register in the class @code{CR_REGS} (@code{cc0} to @code{cc7}). 2401 2402@item G 2403Floating point constant zero 2404 2405@item I 24066-bit signed integer constant 2407 2408@item J 240910-bit signed integer constant 2410 2411@item L 241216-bit signed integer constant 2413 2414@item M 241516-bit unsigned integer constant 2416 2417@item N 241812-bit signed integer constant that is negative---i.e.@: in the 2419range of @minus{}2048 to @minus{}1 2420 2421@item O 2422Constant zero 2423 2424@item P 242512-bit signed integer constant that is greater than zero---i.e.@: in the 2426range of 1 to 2047. 2427 2428@end table 2429 2430@item Blackfin family---@file{config/bfin/constraints.md} 2431@table @code 2432@item a 2433P register 2434 2435@item d 2436D register 2437 2438@item z 2439A call clobbered P register. 2440 2441@item q@var{n} 2442A single register. If @var{n} is in the range 0 to 7, the corresponding D 2443register. If it is @code{A}, then the register P0. 2444 2445@item D 2446Even-numbered D register 2447 2448@item W 2449Odd-numbered D register 2450 2451@item e 2452Accumulator register. 2453 2454@item A 2455Even-numbered accumulator register. 2456 2457@item B 2458Odd-numbered accumulator register. 2459 2460@item b 2461I register 2462 2463@item v 2464B register 2465 2466@item f 2467M register 2468 2469@item c 2470Registers used for circular buffering, i.e. I, B, or L registers. 2471 2472@item C 2473The CC register. 2474 2475@item t 2476LT0 or LT1. 2477 2478@item k 2479LC0 or LC1. 2480 2481@item u 2482LB0 or LB1. 2483 2484@item x 2485Any D, P, B, M, I or L register. 2486 2487@item y 2488Additional registers typically used only in prologues and epilogues: RETS, 2489RETN, RETI, RETX, RETE, ASTAT, SEQSTAT and USP. 2490 2491@item w 2492Any register except accumulators or CC. 2493 2494@item Ksh 2495Signed 16 bit integer (in the range @minus{}32768 to 32767) 2496 2497@item Kuh 2498Unsigned 16 bit integer (in the range 0 to 65535) 2499 2500@item Ks7 2501Signed 7 bit integer (in the range @minus{}64 to 63) 2502 2503@item Ku7 2504Unsigned 7 bit integer (in the range 0 to 127) 2505 2506@item Ku5 2507Unsigned 5 bit integer (in the range 0 to 31) 2508 2509@item Ks4 2510Signed 4 bit integer (in the range @minus{}8 to 7) 2511 2512@item Ks3 2513Signed 3 bit integer (in the range @minus{}3 to 4) 2514 2515@item Ku3 2516Unsigned 3 bit integer (in the range 0 to 7) 2517 2518@item P@var{n} 2519Constant @var{n}, where @var{n} is a single-digit constant in the range 0 to 4. 2520 2521@item PA 2522An integer equal to one of the MACFLAG_XXX constants that is suitable for 2523use with either accumulator. 2524 2525@item PB 2526An integer equal to one of the MACFLAG_XXX constants that is suitable for 2527use only with accumulator A1. 2528 2529@item M1 2530Constant 255. 2531 2532@item M2 2533Constant 65535. 2534 2535@item J 2536An integer constant with exactly a single bit set. 2537 2538@item L 2539An integer constant with all bits set except exactly one. 2540 2541@item H 2542 2543@item Q 2544Any SYMBOL_REF. 2545@end table 2546 2547@item M32C---@file{config/m32c/m32c.c} 2548@table @code 2549@item Rsp 2550@itemx Rfb 2551@itemx Rsb 2552@samp{$sp}, @samp{$fb}, @samp{$sb}. 2553 2554@item Rcr 2555Any control register, when they're 16 bits wide (nothing if control 2556registers are 24 bits wide) 2557 2558@item Rcl 2559Any control register, when they're 24 bits wide. 2560 2561@item R0w 2562@itemx R1w 2563@itemx R2w 2564@itemx R3w 2565$r0, $r1, $r2, $r3. 2566 2567@item R02 2568$r0 or $r2, or $r2r0 for 32 bit values. 2569 2570@item R13 2571$r1 or $r3, or $r3r1 for 32 bit values. 2572 2573@item Rdi 2574A register that can hold a 64 bit value. 2575 2576@item Rhl 2577$r0 or $r1 (registers with addressable high/low bytes) 2578 2579@item R23 2580$r2 or $r3 2581 2582@item Raa 2583Address registers 2584 2585@item Raw 2586Address registers when they're 16 bits wide. 2587 2588@item Ral 2589Address registers when they're 24 bits wide. 2590 2591@item Rqi 2592Registers that can hold QI values. 2593 2594@item Rad 2595Registers that can be used with displacements ($a0, $a1, $sb). 2596 2597@item Rsi 2598Registers that can hold 32 bit values. 2599 2600@item Rhi 2601Registers that can hold 16 bit values. 2602 2603@item Rhc 2604Registers chat can hold 16 bit values, including all control 2605registers. 2606 2607@item Rra 2608$r0 through R1, plus $a0 and $a1. 2609 2610@item Rfl 2611The flags register. 2612 2613@item Rmm 2614The memory-based pseudo-registers $mem0 through $mem15. 2615 2616@item Rpi 2617Registers that can hold pointers (16 bit registers for r8c, m16c; 24 2618bit registers for m32cm, m32c). 2619 2620@item Rpa 2621Matches multiple registers in a PARALLEL to form a larger register. 2622Used to match function return values. 2623 2624@item Is3 2625@minus{}8 @dots{} 7 2626 2627@item IS1 2628@minus{}128 @dots{} 127 2629 2630@item IS2 2631@minus{}32768 @dots{} 32767 2632 2633@item IU2 26340 @dots{} 65535 2635 2636@item In4 2637@minus{}8 @dots{} @minus{}1 or 1 @dots{} 8 2638 2639@item In5 2640@minus{}16 @dots{} @minus{}1 or 1 @dots{} 16 2641 2642@item In6 2643@minus{}32 @dots{} @minus{}1 or 1 @dots{} 32 2644 2645@item IM2 2646@minus{}65536 @dots{} @minus{}1 2647 2648@item Ilb 2649An 8 bit value with exactly one bit set. 2650 2651@item Ilw 2652A 16 bit value with exactly one bit set. 2653 2654@item Sd 2655The common src/dest memory addressing modes. 2656 2657@item Sa 2658Memory addressed using $a0 or $a1. 2659 2660@item Si 2661Memory addressed with immediate addresses. 2662 2663@item Ss 2664Memory addressed using the stack pointer ($sp). 2665 2666@item Sf 2667Memory addressed using the frame base register ($fb). 2668 2669@item Ss 2670Memory addressed using the small base register ($sb). 2671 2672@item S1 2673$r1h 2674@end table 2675 2676@item MeP---@file{config/mep/constraints.md} 2677@table @code 2678 2679@item a 2680The $sp register. 2681 2682@item b 2683The $tp register. 2684 2685@item c 2686Any control register. 2687 2688@item d 2689Either the $hi or the $lo register. 2690 2691@item em 2692Coprocessor registers that can be directly loaded ($c0-$c15). 2693 2694@item ex 2695Coprocessor registers that can be moved to each other. 2696 2697@item er 2698Coprocessor registers that can be moved to core registers. 2699 2700@item h 2701The $hi register. 2702 2703@item j 2704The $rpc register. 2705 2706@item l 2707The $lo register. 2708 2709@item t 2710Registers which can be used in $tp-relative addressing. 2711 2712@item v 2713The $gp register. 2714 2715@item x 2716The coprocessor registers. 2717 2718@item y 2719The coprocessor control registers. 2720 2721@item z 2722The $0 register. 2723 2724@item A 2725User-defined register set A. 2726 2727@item B 2728User-defined register set B. 2729 2730@item C 2731User-defined register set C. 2732 2733@item D 2734User-defined register set D. 2735 2736@item I 2737Offsets for $gp-rel addressing. 2738 2739@item J 2740Constants that can be used directly with boolean insns. 2741 2742@item K 2743Constants that can be moved directly to registers. 2744 2745@item L 2746Small constants that can be added to registers. 2747 2748@item M 2749Long shift counts. 2750 2751@item N 2752Small constants that can be compared to registers. 2753 2754@item O 2755Constants that can be loaded into the top half of registers. 2756 2757@item S 2758Signed 8-bit immediates. 2759 2760@item T 2761Symbols encoded for $tp-rel or $gp-rel addressing. 2762 2763@item U 2764Non-constant addresses for loading/saving coprocessor registers. 2765 2766@item W 2767The top half of a symbol's value. 2768 2769@item Y 2770A register indirect address without offset. 2771 2772@item Z 2773Symbolic references to the control bus. 2774 2775@end table 2776 2777@item MicroBlaze---@file{config/microblaze/constraints.md} 2778@table @code 2779@item d 2780A general register (@code{r0} to @code{r31}). 2781 2782@item z 2783A status register (@code{rmsr}, @code{$fcc1} to @code{$fcc7}). 2784 2785@end table 2786 2787@item MIPS---@file{config/mips/constraints.md} 2788@table @code 2789@item d 2790An address register. This is equivalent to @code{r} unless 2791generating MIPS16 code. 2792 2793@item f 2794A floating-point register (if available). 2795 2796@item h 2797Formerly the @code{hi} register. This constraint is no longer supported. 2798 2799@item l 2800The @code{lo} register. Use this register to store values that are 2801no bigger than a word. 2802 2803@item x 2804The concatenated @code{hi} and @code{lo} registers. Use this register 2805to store doubleword values. 2806 2807@item c 2808A register suitable for use in an indirect jump. This will always be 2809@code{$25} for @option{-mabicalls}. 2810 2811@item v 2812Register @code{$3}. Do not use this constraint in new code; 2813it is retained only for compatibility with glibc. 2814 2815@item y 2816Equivalent to @code{r}; retained for backwards compatibility. 2817 2818@item z 2819A floating-point condition code register. 2820 2821@item I 2822A signed 16-bit constant (for arithmetic instructions). 2823 2824@item J 2825Integer zero. 2826 2827@item K 2828An unsigned 16-bit constant (for logic instructions). 2829 2830@item L 2831A signed 32-bit constant in which the lower 16 bits are zero. 2832Such constants can be loaded using @code{lui}. 2833 2834@item M 2835A constant that cannot be loaded using @code{lui}, @code{addiu} 2836or @code{ori}. 2837 2838@item N 2839A constant in the range @minus{}65535 to @minus{}1 (inclusive). 2840 2841@item O 2842A signed 15-bit constant. 2843 2844@item P 2845A constant in the range 1 to 65535 (inclusive). 2846 2847@item G 2848Floating-point zero. 2849 2850@item R 2851An address that can be used in a non-macro load or store. 2852@end table 2853 2854@item Motorola 680x0---@file{config/m68k/constraints.md} 2855@table @code 2856@item a 2857Address register 2858 2859@item d 2860Data register 2861 2862@item f 286368881 floating-point register, if available 2864 2865@item I 2866Integer in the range 1 to 8 2867 2868@item J 286916-bit signed number 2870 2871@item K 2872Signed number whose magnitude is greater than 0x80 2873 2874@item L 2875Integer in the range @minus{}8 to @minus{}1 2876 2877@item M 2878Signed number whose magnitude is greater than 0x100 2879 2880@item N 2881Range 24 to 31, rotatert:SI 8 to 1 expressed as rotate 2882 2883@item O 288416 (for rotate using swap) 2885 2886@item P 2887Range 8 to 15, rotatert:HI 8 to 1 expressed as rotate 2888 2889@item R 2890Numbers that mov3q can handle 2891 2892@item G 2893Floating point constant that is not a 68881 constant 2894 2895@item S 2896Operands that satisfy 'm' when -mpcrel is in effect 2897 2898@item T 2899Operands that satisfy 's' when -mpcrel is not in effect 2900 2901@item Q 2902Address register indirect addressing mode 2903 2904@item U 2905Register offset addressing 2906 2907@item W 2908const_call_operand 2909 2910@item Cs 2911symbol_ref or const 2912 2913@item Ci 2914const_int 2915 2916@item C0 2917const_int 0 2918 2919@item Cj 2920Range of signed numbers that don't fit in 16 bits 2921 2922@item Cmvq 2923Integers valid for mvq 2924 2925@item Capsw 2926Integers valid for a moveq followed by a swap 2927 2928@item Cmvz 2929Integers valid for mvz 2930 2931@item Cmvs 2932Integers valid for mvs 2933 2934@item Ap 2935push_operand 2936 2937@item Ac 2938Non-register operands allowed in clr 2939 2940@end table 2941 2942@item Moxie---@file{config/moxie/constraints.md} 2943@table @code 2944@item A 2945An absolute address 2946 2947@item B 2948An offset address 2949 2950@item W 2951A register indirect memory operand 2952 2953@item I 2954A constant in the range of 0 to 255. 2955 2956@item N 2957A constant in the range of 0 to @minus{}255. 2958 2959@end table 2960 2961@item PDP-11---@file{config/pdp11/constraints.md} 2962@table @code 2963@item a 2964Floating point registers AC0 through AC3. These can be loaded from/to 2965memory with a single instruction. 2966 2967@item d 2968Odd numbered general registers (R1, R3, R5). These are used for 296916-bit multiply operations. 2970 2971@item f 2972Any of the floating point registers (AC0 through AC5). 2973 2974@item G 2975Floating point constant 0. 2976 2977@item I 2978An integer constant that fits in 16 bits. 2979 2980@item J 2981An integer constant whose low order 16 bits are zero. 2982 2983@item K 2984An integer constant that does not meet the constraints for codes 2985@samp{I} or @samp{J}. 2986 2987@item L 2988The integer constant 1. 2989 2990@item M 2991The integer constant @minus{}1. 2992 2993@item N 2994The integer constant 0. 2995 2996@item O 2997Integer constants @minus{}4 through @minus{}1 and 1 through 4; shifts by these 2998amounts are handled as multiple single-bit shifts rather than a single 2999variable-length shift. 3000 3001@item Q 3002A memory reference which requires an additional word (address or 3003offset) after the opcode. 3004 3005@item R 3006A memory reference that is encoded within the opcode. 3007 3008@end table 3009 3010@item RL78---@file{config/rl78/constraints.md} 3011@table @code 3012 3013@item Int3 3014An integer constant in the range 1 @dots{} 7. 3015@item Int8 3016An integer constant in the range 0 @dots{} 255. 3017@item J 3018An integer constant in the range @minus{}255 @dots{} 0 3019@item K 3020The integer constant 1. 3021@item L 3022The integer constant -1. 3023@item M 3024The integer constant 0. 3025@item N 3026The integer constant 2. 3027@item O 3028The integer constant -2. 3029@item P 3030An integer constant in the range 1 @dots{} 15. 3031@item Qbi 3032The built-in compare types--eq, ne, gtu, ltu, geu, and leu. 3033@item Qsc 3034The synthetic compare types--gt, lt, ge, and le. 3035@item Wab 3036A memory reference with an absolute address. 3037@item Wbc 3038A memory reference using @code{BC} as a base register, with an optional offset. 3039@item Wca 3040A memory reference using @code{AX}, @code{BC}, @code{DE}, or @code{HL} for the address, for calls. 3041@item Wcv 3042A memory reference using any 16-bit register pair for the address, for calls. 3043@item Wd2 3044A memory reference using @code{DE} as a base register, with an optional offset. 3045@item Wde 3046A memory reference using @code{DE} as a base register, without any offset. 3047@item Wfr 3048Any memory reference to an address in the far address space. 3049@item Wh1 3050A memory reference using @code{HL} as a base register, with an optional one-byte offset. 3051@item Whb 3052A memory reference using @code{HL} as a base register, with @code{B} or @code{C} as the index register. 3053@item Whl 3054A memory reference using @code{HL} as a base register, without any offset. 3055@item Ws1 3056A memory reference using @code{SP} as a base register, with an optional one-byte offset. 3057@item Y 3058Any memory reference to an address in the near address space. 3059@item A 3060The @code{AX} register. 3061@item B 3062The @code{BC} register. 3063@item D 3064The @code{DE} register. 3065@item R 3066@code{A} through @code{L} registers. 3067@item S 3068The @code{SP} register. 3069@item T 3070The @code{HL} register. 3071@item Z08W 3072The 16-bit @code{R8} register. 3073@item Z10W 3074The 16-bit @code{R10} register. 3075@item Zint 3076The registers reserved for interrupts (@code{R24} to @code{R31}). 3077@item a 3078The @code{A} register. 3079@item b 3080The @code{B} register. 3081@item c 3082The @code{C} register. 3083@item d 3084The @code{D} register. 3085@item e 3086The @code{E} register. 3087@item h 3088The @code{H} register. 3089@item l 3090The @code{L} register. 3091@item v 3092The virtual registers. 3093@item w 3094The @code{PSW} register. 3095@item x 3096The @code{X} register. 3097 3098@end table 3099 3100@item RX---@file{config/rx/constraints.md} 3101@table @code 3102@item Q 3103An address which does not involve register indirect addressing or 3104pre/post increment/decrement addressing. 3105 3106@item Symbol 3107A symbol reference. 3108 3109@item Int08 3110A constant in the range @minus{}256 to 255, inclusive. 3111 3112@item Sint08 3113A constant in the range @minus{}128 to 127, inclusive. 3114 3115@item Sint16 3116A constant in the range @minus{}32768 to 32767, inclusive. 3117 3118@item Sint24 3119A constant in the range @minus{}8388608 to 8388607, inclusive. 3120 3121@item Uint04 3122A constant in the range 0 to 15, inclusive. 3123 3124@end table 3125 3126@need 1000 3127@item SPARC---@file{config/sparc/sparc.h} 3128@table @code 3129@item f 3130Floating-point register on the SPARC-V8 architecture and 3131lower floating-point register on the SPARC-V9 architecture. 3132 3133@item e 3134Floating-point register. It is equivalent to @samp{f} on the 3135SPARC-V8 architecture and contains both lower and upper 3136floating-point registers on the SPARC-V9 architecture. 3137 3138@item c 3139Floating-point condition code register. 3140 3141@item d 3142Lower floating-point register. It is only valid on the SPARC-V9 3143architecture when the Visual Instruction Set is available. 3144 3145@item b 3146Floating-point register. It is only valid on the SPARC-V9 architecture 3147when the Visual Instruction Set is available. 3148 3149@item h 315064-bit global or out register for the SPARC-V8+ architecture. 3151 3152@item D 3153A vector constant 3154 3155@item I 3156Signed 13-bit constant 3157 3158@item J 3159Zero 3160 3161@item K 316232-bit constant with the low 12 bits clear (a constant that can be 3163loaded with the @code{sethi} instruction) 3164 3165@item L 3166A constant in the range supported by @code{movcc} instructions 3167 3168@item M 3169A constant in the range supported by @code{movrcc} instructions 3170 3171@item N 3172Same as @samp{K}, except that it verifies that bits that are not in the 3173lower 32-bit range are all zero. Must be used instead of @samp{K} for 3174modes wider than @code{SImode} 3175 3176@item O 3177The constant 4096 3178 3179@item G 3180Floating-point zero 3181 3182@item H 3183Signed 13-bit constant, sign-extended to 32 or 64 bits 3184 3185@item Q 3186Floating-point constant whose integral representation can 3187be moved into an integer register using a single sethi 3188instruction 3189 3190@item R 3191Floating-point constant whose integral representation can 3192be moved into an integer register using a single mov 3193instruction 3194 3195@item S 3196Floating-point constant whose integral representation can 3197be moved into an integer register using a high/lo_sum 3198instruction sequence 3199 3200@item T 3201Memory address aligned to an 8-byte boundary 3202 3203@item U 3204Even register 3205 3206@item W 3207Memory address for @samp{e} constraint registers 3208 3209@item Y 3210Vector zero 3211 3212@end table 3213 3214@item SPU---@file{config/spu/spu.h} 3215@table @code 3216@item a 3217An immediate which can be loaded with the il/ila/ilh/ilhu instructions. const_int is treated as a 64 bit value. 3218 3219@item c 3220An immediate for and/xor/or instructions. const_int is treated as a 64 bit value. 3221 3222@item d 3223An immediate for the @code{iohl} instruction. const_int is treated as a 64 bit value. 3224 3225@item f 3226An immediate which can be loaded with @code{fsmbi}. 3227 3228@item A 3229An immediate which can be loaded with the il/ila/ilh/ilhu instructions. const_int is treated as a 32 bit value. 3230 3231@item B 3232An immediate for most arithmetic instructions. const_int is treated as a 32 bit value. 3233 3234@item C 3235An immediate for and/xor/or instructions. const_int is treated as a 32 bit value. 3236 3237@item D 3238An immediate for the @code{iohl} instruction. const_int is treated as a 32 bit value. 3239 3240@item I 3241A constant in the range [@minus{}64, 63] for shift/rotate instructions. 3242 3243@item J 3244An unsigned 7-bit constant for conversion/nop/channel instructions. 3245 3246@item K 3247A signed 10-bit constant for most arithmetic instructions. 3248 3249@item M 3250A signed 16 bit immediate for @code{stop}. 3251 3252@item N 3253An unsigned 16-bit constant for @code{iohl} and @code{fsmbi}. 3254 3255@item O 3256An unsigned 7-bit constant whose 3 least significant bits are 0. 3257 3258@item P 3259An unsigned 3-bit constant for 16-byte rotates and shifts 3260 3261@item R 3262Call operand, reg, for indirect calls 3263 3264@item S 3265Call operand, symbol, for relative calls. 3266 3267@item T 3268Call operand, const_int, for absolute calls. 3269 3270@item U 3271An immediate which can be loaded with the il/ila/ilh/ilhu instructions. const_int is sign extended to 128 bit. 3272 3273@item W 3274An immediate for shift and rotate instructions. const_int is treated as a 32 bit value. 3275 3276@item Y 3277An immediate for and/xor/or instructions. const_int is sign extended as a 128 bit. 3278 3279@item Z 3280An immediate for the @code{iohl} instruction. const_int is sign extended to 128 bit. 3281 3282@end table 3283 3284@item S/390 and zSeries---@file{config/s390/s390.h} 3285@table @code 3286@item a 3287Address register (general purpose register except r0) 3288 3289@item c 3290Condition code register 3291 3292@item d 3293Data register (arbitrary general purpose register) 3294 3295@item f 3296Floating-point register 3297 3298@item I 3299Unsigned 8-bit constant (0--255) 3300 3301@item J 3302Unsigned 12-bit constant (0--4095) 3303 3304@item K 3305Signed 16-bit constant (@minus{}32768--32767) 3306 3307@item L 3308Value appropriate as displacement. 3309@table @code 3310@item (0..4095) 3311for short displacement 3312@item (@minus{}524288..524287) 3313for long displacement 3314@end table 3315 3316@item M 3317Constant integer with a value of 0x7fffffff. 3318 3319@item N 3320Multiple letter constraint followed by 4 parameter letters. 3321@table @code 3322@item 0..9: 3323number of the part counting from most to least significant 3324@item H,Q: 3325mode of the part 3326@item D,S,H: 3327mode of the containing operand 3328@item 0,F: 3329value of the other parts (F---all bits set) 3330@end table 3331The constraint matches if the specified part of a constant 3332has a value different from its other parts. 3333 3334@item Q 3335Memory reference without index register and with short displacement. 3336 3337@item R 3338Memory reference with index register and short displacement. 3339 3340@item S 3341Memory reference without index register but with long displacement. 3342 3343@item T 3344Memory reference with index register and long displacement. 3345 3346@item U 3347Pointer with short displacement. 3348 3349@item W 3350Pointer with long displacement. 3351 3352@item Y 3353Shift count operand. 3354 3355@end table 3356 3357@item Score family---@file{config/score/score.h} 3358@table @code 3359@item d 3360Registers from r0 to r32. 3361 3362@item e 3363Registers from r0 to r16. 3364 3365@item t 3366r8---r11 or r22---r27 registers. 3367 3368@item h 3369hi register. 3370 3371@item l 3372lo register. 3373 3374@item x 3375hi + lo register. 3376 3377@item q 3378cnt register. 3379 3380@item y 3381lcb register. 3382 3383@item z 3384scb register. 3385 3386@item a 3387cnt + lcb + scb register. 3388 3389@item c 3390cr0---cr15 register. 3391 3392@item b 3393cp1 registers. 3394 3395@item f 3396cp2 registers. 3397 3398@item i 3399cp3 registers. 3400 3401@item j 3402cp1 + cp2 + cp3 registers. 3403 3404@item I 3405High 16-bit constant (32-bit constant with 16 LSBs zero). 3406 3407@item J 3408Unsigned 5 bit integer (in the range 0 to 31). 3409 3410@item K 3411Unsigned 16 bit integer (in the range 0 to 65535). 3412 3413@item L 3414Signed 16 bit integer (in the range @minus{}32768 to 32767). 3415 3416@item M 3417Unsigned 14 bit integer (in the range 0 to 16383). 3418 3419@item N 3420Signed 14 bit integer (in the range @minus{}8192 to 8191). 3421 3422@item Z 3423Any SYMBOL_REF. 3424@end table 3425 3426@item Xstormy16---@file{config/stormy16/stormy16.h} 3427@table @code 3428@item a 3429Register r0. 3430 3431@item b 3432Register r1. 3433 3434@item c 3435Register r2. 3436 3437@item d 3438Register r8. 3439 3440@item e 3441Registers r0 through r7. 3442 3443@item t 3444Registers r0 and r1. 3445 3446@item y 3447The carry register. 3448 3449@item z 3450Registers r8 and r9. 3451 3452@item I 3453A constant between 0 and 3 inclusive. 3454 3455@item J 3456A constant that has exactly one bit set. 3457 3458@item K 3459A constant that has exactly one bit clear. 3460 3461@item L 3462A constant between 0 and 255 inclusive. 3463 3464@item M 3465A constant between @minus{}255 and 0 inclusive. 3466 3467@item N 3468A constant between @minus{}3 and 0 inclusive. 3469 3470@item O 3471A constant between 1 and 4 inclusive. 3472 3473@item P 3474A constant between @minus{}4 and @minus{}1 inclusive. 3475 3476@item Q 3477A memory reference that is a stack push. 3478 3479@item R 3480A memory reference that is a stack pop. 3481 3482@item S 3483A memory reference that refers to a constant address of known value. 3484 3485@item T 3486The register indicated by Rx (not implemented yet). 3487 3488@item U 3489A constant that is not between 2 and 15 inclusive. 3490 3491@item Z 3492The constant 0. 3493 3494@end table 3495 3496@item TI C6X family---@file{config/c6x/constraints.md} 3497@table @code 3498@item a 3499Register file A (A0--A31). 3500 3501@item b 3502Register file B (B0--B31). 3503 3504@item A 3505Predicate registers in register file A (A0--A2 on C64X and 3506higher, A1 and A2 otherwise). 3507 3508@item B 3509Predicate registers in register file B (B0--B2). 3510 3511@item C 3512A call-used register in register file B (B0--B9, B16--B31). 3513 3514@item Da 3515Register file A, excluding predicate registers (A3--A31, 3516plus A0 if not C64X or higher). 3517 3518@item Db 3519Register file B, excluding predicate registers (B3--B31). 3520 3521@item Iu4 3522Integer constant in the range 0 @dots{} 15. 3523 3524@item Iu5 3525Integer constant in the range 0 @dots{} 31. 3526 3527@item In5 3528Integer constant in the range @minus{}31 @dots{} 0. 3529 3530@item Is5 3531Integer constant in the range @minus{}16 @dots{} 15. 3532 3533@item I5x 3534Integer constant that can be the operand of an ADDA or a SUBA insn. 3535 3536@item IuB 3537Integer constant in the range 0 @dots{} 65535. 3538 3539@item IsB 3540Integer constant in the range @minus{}32768 @dots{} 32767. 3541 3542@item IsC 3543Integer constant in the range @math{-2^{20}} @dots{} @math{2^{20} - 1}. 3544 3545@item Jc 3546Integer constant that is a valid mask for the clr instruction. 3547 3548@item Js 3549Integer constant that is a valid mask for the set instruction. 3550 3551@item Q 3552Memory location with A base register. 3553 3554@item R 3555Memory location with B base register. 3556 3557@ifset INTERNALS 3558@item S0 3559On C64x+ targets, a GP-relative small data reference. 3560 3561@item S1 3562Any kind of @code{SYMBOL_REF}, for use in a call address. 3563 3564@item Si 3565Any kind of immediate operand, unless it matches the S0 constraint. 3566 3567@item T 3568Memory location with B base register, but not using a long offset. 3569 3570@item W 3571A memory operand with an address that can't be used in an unaligned access. 3572 3573@end ifset 3574@item Z 3575Register B14 (aka DP). 3576 3577@end table 3578 3579@item TILE-Gx---@file{config/tilegx/constraints.md} 3580@table @code 3581@item R00 3582@itemx R01 3583@itemx R02 3584@itemx R03 3585@itemx R04 3586@itemx R05 3587@itemx R06 3588@itemx R07 3589@itemx R08 3590@itemx R09 3591@itemx R10 3592Each of these represents a register constraint for an individual 3593register, from r0 to r10. 3594 3595@item I 3596Signed 8-bit integer constant. 3597 3598@item J 3599Signed 16-bit integer constant. 3600 3601@item K 3602Unsigned 16-bit integer constant. 3603 3604@item L 3605Integer constant that fits in one signed byte when incremented by one 3606(@minus{}129 @dots{} 126). 3607 3608@item m 3609Memory operand. If used together with @samp{<} or @samp{>}, the 3610operand can have postincrement which requires printing with @samp{%In} 3611and @samp{%in} on TILE-Gx. For example: 3612 3613@smallexample 3614asm ("st_add %I0,%1,%i0" : "=m<>" (*mem) : "r" (val)); 3615@end smallexample 3616 3617@item M 3618A bit mask suitable for the BFINS instruction. 3619 3620@item N 3621Integer constant that is a byte tiled out eight times. 3622 3623@item O 3624The integer zero constant. 3625 3626@item P 3627Integer constant that is a sign-extended byte tiled out as four shorts. 3628 3629@item Q 3630Integer constant that fits in one signed byte when incremented 3631(@minus{}129 @dots{} 126), but excluding -1. 3632 3633@item S 3634Integer constant that has all 1 bits consecutive and starting at bit 0. 3635 3636@item T 3637A 16-bit fragment of a got, tls, or pc-relative reference. 3638 3639@item U 3640Memory operand except postincrement. This is roughly the same as 3641@samp{m} when not used together with @samp{<} or @samp{>}. 3642 3643@item W 3644An 8-element vector constant with identical elements. 3645 3646@item Y 3647A 4-element vector constant with identical elements. 3648 3649@item Z0 3650The integer constant 0xffffffff. 3651 3652@item Z1 3653The integer constant 0xffffffff00000000. 3654 3655@end table 3656 3657@item TILEPro---@file{config/tilepro/constraints.md} 3658@table @code 3659@item R00 3660@itemx R01 3661@itemx R02 3662@itemx R03 3663@itemx R04 3664@itemx R05 3665@itemx R06 3666@itemx R07 3667@itemx R08 3668@itemx R09 3669@itemx R10 3670Each of these represents a register constraint for an individual 3671register, from r0 to r10. 3672 3673@item I 3674Signed 8-bit integer constant. 3675 3676@item J 3677Signed 16-bit integer constant. 3678 3679@item K 3680Nonzero integer constant with low 16 bits zero. 3681 3682@item L 3683Integer constant that fits in one signed byte when incremented by one 3684(@minus{}129 @dots{} 126). 3685 3686@item m 3687Memory operand. If used together with @samp{<} or @samp{>}, the 3688operand can have postincrement which requires printing with @samp{%In} 3689and @samp{%in} on TILEPro. For example: 3690 3691@smallexample 3692asm ("swadd %I0,%1,%i0" : "=m<>" (mem) : "r" (val)); 3693@end smallexample 3694 3695@item M 3696A bit mask suitable for the MM instruction. 3697 3698@item N 3699Integer constant that is a byte tiled out four times. 3700 3701@item O 3702The integer zero constant. 3703 3704@item P 3705Integer constant that is a sign-extended byte tiled out as two shorts. 3706 3707@item Q 3708Integer constant that fits in one signed byte when incremented 3709(@minus{}129 @dots{} 126), but excluding -1. 3710 3711@item T 3712A symbolic operand, or a 16-bit fragment of a got, tls, or pc-relative 3713reference. 3714 3715@item U 3716Memory operand except postincrement. This is roughly the same as 3717@samp{m} when not used together with @samp{<} or @samp{>}. 3718 3719@item W 3720A 4-element vector constant with identical elements. 3721 3722@item Y 3723A 2-element vector constant with identical elements. 3724 3725@end table 3726 3727@item Xtensa---@file{config/xtensa/constraints.md} 3728@table @code 3729@item a 3730General-purpose 32-bit register 3731 3732@item b 3733One-bit boolean register 3734 3735@item A 3736MAC16 40-bit accumulator register 3737 3738@item I 3739Signed 12-bit integer constant, for use in MOVI instructions 3740 3741@item J 3742Signed 8-bit integer constant, for use in ADDI instructions 3743 3744@item K 3745Integer constant valid for BccI instructions 3746 3747@item L 3748Unsigned constant valid for BccUI instructions 3749 3750@end table 3751 3752@end table 3753 3754@ifset INTERNALS 3755@node Disable Insn Alternatives 3756@subsection Disable insn alternatives using the @code{enabled} attribute 3757@cindex enabled 3758 3759The @code{enabled} insn attribute may be used to disable certain insn 3760alternatives for machine-specific reasons. This is useful when adding 3761new instructions to an existing pattern which are only available for 3762certain cpu architecture levels as specified with the @code{-march=} 3763option. 3764 3765If an insn alternative is disabled, then it will never be used. The 3766compiler treats the constraints for the disabled alternative as 3767unsatisfiable. 3768 3769In order to make use of the @code{enabled} attribute a back end has to add 3770in the machine description files: 3771 3772@enumerate 3773@item 3774A definition of the @code{enabled} insn attribute. The attribute is 3775defined as usual using the @code{define_attr} command. This 3776definition should be based on other insn attributes and/or target flags. 3777The @code{enabled} attribute is a numeric attribute and should evaluate to 3778@code{(const_int 1)} for an enabled alternative and to 3779@code{(const_int 0)} otherwise. 3780@item 3781A definition of another insn attribute used to describe for what 3782reason an insn alternative might be available or 3783not. E.g. @code{cpu_facility} as in the example below. 3784@item 3785An assignment for the second attribute to each insn definition 3786combining instructions which are not all available under the same 3787circumstances. (Note: It obviously only makes sense for definitions 3788with more than one alternative. Otherwise the insn pattern should be 3789disabled or enabled using the insn condition.) 3790@end enumerate 3791 3792E.g. the following two patterns could easily be merged using the @code{enabled} 3793attribute: 3794 3795@smallexample 3796 3797(define_insn "*movdi_old" 3798 [(set (match_operand:DI 0 "register_operand" "=d") 3799 (match_operand:DI 1 "register_operand" " d"))] 3800 "!TARGET_NEW" 3801 "lgr %0,%1") 3802 3803(define_insn "*movdi_new" 3804 [(set (match_operand:DI 0 "register_operand" "=d,f,d") 3805 (match_operand:DI 1 "register_operand" " d,d,f"))] 3806 "TARGET_NEW" 3807 "@@ 3808 lgr %0,%1 3809 ldgr %0,%1 3810 lgdr %0,%1") 3811 3812@end smallexample 3813 3814to: 3815 3816@smallexample 3817 3818(define_insn "*movdi_combined" 3819 [(set (match_operand:DI 0 "register_operand" "=d,f,d") 3820 (match_operand:DI 1 "register_operand" " d,d,f"))] 3821 "" 3822 "@@ 3823 lgr %0,%1 3824 ldgr %0,%1 3825 lgdr %0,%1" 3826 [(set_attr "cpu_facility" "*,new,new")]) 3827 3828@end smallexample 3829 3830with the @code{enabled} attribute defined like this: 3831 3832@smallexample 3833 3834(define_attr "cpu_facility" "standard,new" (const_string "standard")) 3835 3836(define_attr "enabled" "" 3837 (cond [(eq_attr "cpu_facility" "standard") (const_int 1) 3838 (and (eq_attr "cpu_facility" "new") 3839 (ne (symbol_ref "TARGET_NEW") (const_int 0))) 3840 (const_int 1)] 3841 (const_int 0))) 3842 3843@end smallexample 3844 3845@end ifset 3846 3847@ifset INTERNALS 3848@node Define Constraints 3849@subsection Defining Machine-Specific Constraints 3850@cindex defining constraints 3851@cindex constraints, defining 3852 3853Machine-specific constraints fall into two categories: register and 3854non-register constraints. Within the latter category, constraints 3855which allow subsets of all possible memory or address operands should 3856be specially marked, to give @code{reload} more information. 3857 3858Machine-specific constraints can be given names of arbitrary length, 3859but they must be entirely composed of letters, digits, underscores 3860(@samp{_}), and angle brackets (@samp{< >}). Like C identifiers, they 3861must begin with a letter or underscore. 3862 3863In order to avoid ambiguity in operand constraint strings, no 3864constraint can have a name that begins with any other constraint's 3865name. For example, if @code{x} is defined as a constraint name, 3866@code{xy} may not be, and vice versa. As a consequence of this rule, 3867no constraint may begin with one of the generic constraint letters: 3868@samp{E F V X g i m n o p r s}. 3869 3870Register constraints correspond directly to register classes. 3871@xref{Register Classes}. There is thus not much flexibility in their 3872definitions. 3873 3874@deffn {MD Expression} define_register_constraint name regclass docstring 3875All three arguments are string constants. 3876@var{name} is the name of the constraint, as it will appear in 3877@code{match_operand} expressions. If @var{name} is a multi-letter 3878constraint its length shall be the same for all constraints starting 3879with the same letter. @var{regclass} can be either the 3880name of the corresponding register class (@pxref{Register Classes}), 3881or a C expression which evaluates to the appropriate register class. 3882If it is an expression, it must have no side effects, and it cannot 3883look at the operand. The usual use of expressions is to map some 3884register constraints to @code{NO_REGS} when the register class 3885is not available on a given subarchitecture. 3886 3887@var{docstring} is a sentence documenting the meaning of the 3888constraint. Docstrings are explained further below. 3889@end deffn 3890 3891Non-register constraints are more like predicates: the constraint 3892definition gives a Boolean expression which indicates whether the 3893constraint matches. 3894 3895@deffn {MD Expression} define_constraint name docstring exp 3896The @var{name} and @var{docstring} arguments are the same as for 3897@code{define_register_constraint}, but note that the docstring comes 3898immediately after the name for these expressions. @var{exp} is an RTL 3899expression, obeying the same rules as the RTL expressions in predicate 3900definitions. @xref{Defining Predicates}, for details. If it 3901evaluates true, the constraint matches; if it evaluates false, it 3902doesn't. Constraint expressions should indicate which RTL codes they 3903might match, just like predicate expressions. 3904 3905@code{match_test} C expressions have access to the 3906following variables: 3907 3908@table @var 3909@item op 3910The RTL object defining the operand. 3911@item mode 3912The machine mode of @var{op}. 3913@item ival 3914@samp{INTVAL (@var{op})}, if @var{op} is a @code{const_int}. 3915@item hval 3916@samp{CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (@var{op})}, if @var{op} is an integer 3917@code{const_double}. 3918@item lval 3919@samp{CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (@var{op})}, if @var{op} is an integer 3920@code{const_double}. 3921@item rval 3922@samp{CONST_DOUBLE_REAL_VALUE (@var{op})}, if @var{op} is a floating-point 3923@code{const_double}. 3924@end table 3925 3926The @var{*val} variables should only be used once another piece of the 3927expression has verified that @var{op} is the appropriate kind of RTL 3928object. 3929@end deffn 3930 3931Most non-register constraints should be defined with 3932@code{define_constraint}. The remaining two definition expressions 3933are only appropriate for constraints that should be handled specially 3934by @code{reload} if they fail to match. 3935 3936@deffn {MD Expression} define_memory_constraint name docstring exp 3937Use this expression for constraints that match a subset of all memory 3938operands: that is, @code{reload} can make them match by converting the 3939operand to the form @samp{@w{(mem (reg @var{X}))}}, where @var{X} is a 3940base register (from the register class specified by 3941@code{BASE_REG_CLASS}, @pxref{Register Classes}). 3942 3943For example, on the S/390, some instructions do not accept arbitrary 3944memory references, but only those that do not make use of an index 3945register. The constraint letter @samp{Q} is defined to represent a 3946memory address of this type. If @samp{Q} is defined with 3947@code{define_memory_constraint}, a @samp{Q} constraint can handle any 3948memory operand, because @code{reload} knows it can simply copy the 3949memory address into a base register if required. This is analogous to 3950the way an @samp{o} constraint can handle any memory operand. 3951 3952The syntax and semantics are otherwise identical to 3953@code{define_constraint}. 3954@end deffn 3955 3956@deffn {MD Expression} define_address_constraint name docstring exp 3957Use this expression for constraints that match a subset of all address 3958operands: that is, @code{reload} can make the constraint match by 3959converting the operand to the form @samp{@w{(reg @var{X})}}, again 3960with @var{X} a base register. 3961 3962Constraints defined with @code{define_address_constraint} can only be 3963used with the @code{address_operand} predicate, or machine-specific 3964predicates that work the same way. They are treated analogously to 3965the generic @samp{p} constraint. 3966 3967The syntax and semantics are otherwise identical to 3968@code{define_constraint}. 3969@end deffn 3970 3971For historical reasons, names beginning with the letters @samp{G H} 3972are reserved for constraints that match only @code{const_double}s, and 3973names beginning with the letters @samp{I J K L M N O P} are reserved 3974for constraints that match only @code{const_int}s. This may change in 3975the future. For the time being, constraints with these names must be 3976written in a stylized form, so that @code{genpreds} can tell you did 3977it correctly: 3978 3979@smallexample 3980@group 3981(define_constraint "[@var{GHIJKLMNOP}]@dots{}" 3982 "@var{doc}@dots{}" 3983 (and (match_code "const_int") ; @r{@code{const_double} for G/H} 3984 @var{condition}@dots{})) ; @r{usually a @code{match_test}} 3985@end group 3986@end smallexample 3987@c the semicolons line up in the formatted manual 3988 3989It is fine to use names beginning with other letters for constraints 3990that match @code{const_double}s or @code{const_int}s. 3991 3992Each docstring in a constraint definition should be one or more complete 3993sentences, marked up in Texinfo format. @emph{They are currently unused.} 3994In the future they will be copied into the GCC manual, in @ref{Machine 3995Constraints}, replacing the hand-maintained tables currently found in 3996that section. Also, in the future the compiler may use this to give 3997more helpful diagnostics when poor choice of @code{asm} constraints 3998causes a reload failure. 3999 4000If you put the pseudo-Texinfo directive @samp{@@internal} at the 4001beginning of a docstring, then (in the future) it will appear only in 4002the internals manual's version of the machine-specific constraint tables. 4003Use this for constraints that should not appear in @code{asm} statements. 4004 4005@node C Constraint Interface 4006@subsection Testing constraints from C 4007@cindex testing constraints 4008@cindex constraints, testing 4009 4010It is occasionally useful to test a constraint from C code rather than 4011implicitly via the constraint string in a @code{match_operand}. The 4012generated file @file{tm_p.h} declares a few interfaces for working 4013with machine-specific constraints. None of these interfaces work with 4014the generic constraints described in @ref{Simple Constraints}. This 4015may change in the future. 4016 4017@strong{Warning:} @file{tm_p.h} may declare other functions that 4018operate on constraints, besides the ones documented here. Do not use 4019those functions from machine-dependent code. They exist to implement 4020the old constraint interface that machine-independent components of 4021the compiler still expect. They will change or disappear in the 4022future. 4023 4024Some valid constraint names are not valid C identifiers, so there is a 4025mangling scheme for referring to them from C@. Constraint names that 4026do not contain angle brackets or underscores are left unchanged. 4027Underscores are doubled, each @samp{<} is replaced with @samp{_l}, and 4028each @samp{>} with @samp{_g}. Here are some examples: 4029 4030@c the @c's prevent double blank lines in the printed manual. 4031@example 4032@multitable {Original} {Mangled} 4033@item @strong{Original} @tab @strong{Mangled} @c 4034@item @code{x} @tab @code{x} @c 4035@item @code{P42x} @tab @code{P42x} @c 4036@item @code{P4_x} @tab @code{P4__x} @c 4037@item @code{P4>x} @tab @code{P4_gx} @c 4038@item @code{P4>>} @tab @code{P4_g_g} @c 4039@item @code{P4_g>} @tab @code{P4__g_g} @c 4040@end multitable 4041@end example 4042 4043Throughout this section, the variable @var{c} is either a constraint 4044in the abstract sense, or a constant from @code{enum constraint_num}; 4045the variable @var{m} is a mangled constraint name (usually as part of 4046a larger identifier). 4047 4048@deftp Enum constraint_num 4049For each machine-specific constraint, there is a corresponding 4050enumeration constant: @samp{CONSTRAINT_} plus the mangled name of the 4051constraint. Functions that take an @code{enum constraint_num} as an 4052argument expect one of these constants. 4053 4054Machine-independent constraints do not have associated constants. 4055This may change in the future. 4056@end deftp 4057 4058@deftypefun {inline bool} satisfies_constraint_@var{m} (rtx @var{exp}) 4059For each machine-specific, non-register constraint @var{m}, there is 4060one of these functions; it returns @code{true} if @var{exp} satisfies the 4061constraint. These functions are only visible if @file{rtl.h} was included 4062before @file{tm_p.h}. 4063@end deftypefun 4064 4065@deftypefun bool constraint_satisfied_p (rtx @var{exp}, enum constraint_num @var{c}) 4066Like the @code{satisfies_constraint_@var{m}} functions, but the 4067constraint to test is given as an argument, @var{c}. If @var{c} 4068specifies a register constraint, this function will always return 4069@code{false}. 4070@end deftypefun 4071 4072@deftypefun {enum reg_class} regclass_for_constraint (enum constraint_num @var{c}) 4073Returns the register class associated with @var{c}. If @var{c} is not 4074a register constraint, or those registers are not available for the 4075currently selected subtarget, returns @code{NO_REGS}. 4076@end deftypefun 4077 4078Here is an example use of @code{satisfies_constraint_@var{m}}. In 4079peephole optimizations (@pxref{Peephole Definitions}), operand 4080constraint strings are ignored, so if there are relevant constraints, 4081they must be tested in the C condition. In the example, the 4082optimization is applied if operand 2 does @emph{not} satisfy the 4083@samp{K} constraint. (This is a simplified version of a peephole 4084definition from the i386 machine description.) 4085 4086@smallexample 4087(define_peephole2 4088 [(match_scratch:SI 3 "r") 4089 (set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "") 4090 (mult:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "memory_operand" "") 4091 (match_operand:SI 2 "immediate_operand" "")))] 4092 4093 "!satisfies_constraint_K (operands[2])" 4094 4095 [(set (match_dup 3) (match_dup 1)) 4096 (set (match_dup 0) (mult:SI (match_dup 3) (match_dup 2)))] 4097 4098 "") 4099@end smallexample 4100 4101@node Standard Names 4102@section Standard Pattern Names For Generation 4103@cindex standard pattern names 4104@cindex pattern names 4105@cindex names, pattern 4106 4107Here is a table of the instruction names that are meaningful in the RTL 4108generation pass of the compiler. Giving one of these names to an 4109instruction pattern tells the RTL generation pass that it can use the 4110pattern to accomplish a certain task. 4111 4112@table @asis 4113@cindex @code{mov@var{m}} instruction pattern 4114@item @samp{mov@var{m}} 4115Here @var{m} stands for a two-letter machine mode name, in lowercase. 4116This instruction pattern moves data with that machine mode from operand 41171 to operand 0. For example, @samp{movsi} moves full-word data. 4118 4119If operand 0 is a @code{subreg} with mode @var{m} of a register whose 4120own mode is wider than @var{m}, the effect of this instruction is 4121to store the specified value in the part of the register that corresponds 4122to mode @var{m}. Bits outside of @var{m}, but which are within the 4123same target word as the @code{subreg} are undefined. Bits which are 4124outside the target word are left unchanged. 4125 4126This class of patterns is special in several ways. First of all, each 4127of these names up to and including full word size @emph{must} be defined, 4128because there is no other way to copy a datum from one place to another. 4129If there are patterns accepting operands in larger modes, 4130@samp{mov@var{m}} must be defined for integer modes of those sizes. 4131 4132Second, these patterns are not used solely in the RTL generation pass. 4133Even the reload pass can generate move insns to copy values from stack 4134slots into temporary registers. When it does so, one of the operands is 4135a hard register and the other is an operand that can need to be reloaded 4136into a register. 4137 4138@findex force_reg 4139Therefore, when given such a pair of operands, the pattern must generate 4140RTL which needs no reloading and needs no temporary registers---no 4141registers other than the operands. For example, if you support the 4142pattern with a @code{define_expand}, then in such a case the 4143@code{define_expand} mustn't call @code{force_reg} or any other such 4144function which might generate new pseudo registers. 4145 4146This requirement exists even for subword modes on a RISC machine where 4147fetching those modes from memory normally requires several insns and 4148some temporary registers. 4149 4150@findex change_address 4151During reload a memory reference with an invalid address may be passed 4152as an operand. Such an address will be replaced with a valid address 4153later in the reload pass. In this case, nothing may be done with the 4154address except to use it as it stands. If it is copied, it will not be 4155replaced with a valid address. No attempt should be made to make such 4156an address into a valid address and no routine (such as 4157@code{change_address}) that will do so may be called. Note that 4158@code{general_operand} will fail when applied to such an address. 4159 4160@findex reload_in_progress 4161The global variable @code{reload_in_progress} (which must be explicitly 4162declared if required) can be used to determine whether such special 4163handling is required. 4164 4165The variety of operands that have reloads depends on the rest of the 4166machine description, but typically on a RISC machine these can only be 4167pseudo registers that did not get hard registers, while on other 4168machines explicit memory references will get optional reloads. 4169 4170If a scratch register is required to move an object to or from memory, 4171it can be allocated using @code{gen_reg_rtx} prior to life analysis. 4172 4173If there are cases which need scratch registers during or after reload, 4174you must provide an appropriate secondary_reload target hook. 4175 4176@findex can_create_pseudo_p 4177The macro @code{can_create_pseudo_p} can be used to determine if it 4178is unsafe to create new pseudo registers. If this variable is nonzero, then 4179it is unsafe to call @code{gen_reg_rtx} to allocate a new pseudo. 4180 4181The constraints on a @samp{mov@var{m}} must permit moving any hard 4182register to any other hard register provided that 4183@code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} permits mode @var{m} in both registers and 4184@code{TARGET_REGISTER_MOVE_COST} applied to their classes returns a value 4185of 2. 4186 4187It is obligatory to support floating point @samp{mov@var{m}} 4188instructions into and out of any registers that can hold fixed point 4189values, because unions and structures (which have modes @code{SImode} or 4190@code{DImode}) can be in those registers and they may have floating 4191point members. 4192 4193There may also be a need to support fixed point @samp{mov@var{m}} 4194instructions in and out of floating point registers. Unfortunately, I 4195have forgotten why this was so, and I don't know whether it is still 4196true. If @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} rejects fixed point values in 4197floating point registers, then the constraints of the fixed point 4198@samp{mov@var{m}} instructions must be designed to avoid ever trying to 4199reload into a floating point register. 4200 4201@cindex @code{reload_in} instruction pattern 4202@cindex @code{reload_out} instruction pattern 4203@item @samp{reload_in@var{m}} 4204@itemx @samp{reload_out@var{m}} 4205These named patterns have been obsoleted by the target hook 4206@code{secondary_reload}. 4207 4208Like @samp{mov@var{m}}, but used when a scratch register is required to 4209move between operand 0 and operand 1. Operand 2 describes the scratch 4210register. See the discussion of the @code{SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS} 4211macro in @pxref{Register Classes}. 4212 4213There are special restrictions on the form of the @code{match_operand}s 4214used in these patterns. First, only the predicate for the reload 4215operand is examined, i.e., @code{reload_in} examines operand 1, but not 4216the predicates for operand 0 or 2. Second, there may be only one 4217alternative in the constraints. Third, only a single register class 4218letter may be used for the constraint; subsequent constraint letters 4219are ignored. As a special exception, an empty constraint string 4220matches the @code{ALL_REGS} register class. This may relieve ports 4221of the burden of defining an @code{ALL_REGS} constraint letter just 4222for these patterns. 4223 4224@cindex @code{movstrict@var{m}} instruction pattern 4225@item @samp{movstrict@var{m}} 4226Like @samp{mov@var{m}} except that if operand 0 is a @code{subreg} 4227with mode @var{m} of a register whose natural mode is wider, 4228the @samp{movstrict@var{m}} instruction is guaranteed not to alter 4229any of the register except the part which belongs to mode @var{m}. 4230 4231@cindex @code{movmisalign@var{m}} instruction pattern 4232@item @samp{movmisalign@var{m}} 4233This variant of a move pattern is designed to load or store a value 4234from a memory address that is not naturally aligned for its mode. 4235For a store, the memory will be in operand 0; for a load, the memory 4236will be in operand 1. The other operand is guaranteed not to be a 4237memory, so that it's easy to tell whether this is a load or store. 4238 4239This pattern is used by the autovectorizer, and when expanding a 4240@code{MISALIGNED_INDIRECT_REF} expression. 4241 4242@cindex @code{load_multiple} instruction pattern 4243@item @samp{load_multiple} 4244Load several consecutive memory locations into consecutive registers. 4245Operand 0 is the first of the consecutive registers, operand 1 4246is the first memory location, and operand 2 is a constant: the 4247number of consecutive registers. 4248 4249Define this only if the target machine really has such an instruction; 4250do not define this if the most efficient way of loading consecutive 4251registers from memory is to do them one at a time. 4252 4253On some machines, there are restrictions as to which consecutive 4254registers can be stored into memory, such as particular starting or 4255ending register numbers or only a range of valid counts. For those 4256machines, use a @code{define_expand} (@pxref{Expander Definitions}) 4257and make the pattern fail if the restrictions are not met. 4258 4259Write the generated insn as a @code{parallel} with elements being a 4260@code{set} of one register from the appropriate memory location (you may 4261also need @code{use} or @code{clobber} elements). Use a 4262@code{match_parallel} (@pxref{RTL Template}) to recognize the insn. See 4263@file{rs6000.md} for examples of the use of this insn pattern. 4264 4265@cindex @samp{store_multiple} instruction pattern 4266@item @samp{store_multiple} 4267Similar to @samp{load_multiple}, but store several consecutive registers 4268into consecutive memory locations. Operand 0 is the first of the 4269consecutive memory locations, operand 1 is the first register, and 4270operand 2 is a constant: the number of consecutive registers. 4271 4272@cindex @code{vec_load_lanes@var{m}@var{n}} instruction pattern 4273@item @samp{vec_load_lanes@var{m}@var{n}} 4274Perform an interleaved load of several vectors from memory operand 1 4275into register operand 0. Both operands have mode @var{m}. The register 4276operand is viewed as holding consecutive vectors of mode @var{n}, 4277while the memory operand is a flat array that contains the same number 4278of elements. The operation is equivalent to: 4279 4280@smallexample 4281int c = GET_MODE_SIZE (@var{m}) / GET_MODE_SIZE (@var{n}); 4282for (j = 0; j < GET_MODE_NUNITS (@var{n}); j++) 4283 for (i = 0; i < c; i++) 4284 operand0[i][j] = operand1[j * c + i]; 4285@end smallexample 4286 4287For example, @samp{vec_load_lanestiv4hi} loads 8 16-bit values 4288from memory into a register of mode @samp{TI}@. The register 4289contains two consecutive vectors of mode @samp{V4HI}@. 4290 4291This pattern can only be used if: 4292@smallexample 4293TARGET_ARRAY_MODE_SUPPORTED_P (@var{n}, @var{c}) 4294@end smallexample 4295is true. GCC assumes that, if a target supports this kind of 4296instruction for some mode @var{n}, it also supports unaligned 4297loads for vectors of mode @var{n}. 4298 4299@cindex @code{vec_store_lanes@var{m}@var{n}} instruction pattern 4300@item @samp{vec_store_lanes@var{m}@var{n}} 4301Equivalent to @samp{vec_load_lanes@var{m}@var{n}}, with the memory 4302and register operands reversed. That is, the instruction is 4303equivalent to: 4304 4305@smallexample 4306int c = GET_MODE_SIZE (@var{m}) / GET_MODE_SIZE (@var{n}); 4307for (j = 0; j < GET_MODE_NUNITS (@var{n}); j++) 4308 for (i = 0; i < c; i++) 4309 operand0[j * c + i] = operand1[i][j]; 4310@end smallexample 4311 4312for a memory operand 0 and register operand 1. 4313 4314@cindex @code{vec_set@var{m}} instruction pattern 4315@item @samp{vec_set@var{m}} 4316Set given field in the vector value. Operand 0 is the vector to modify, 4317operand 1 is new value of field and operand 2 specify the field index. 4318 4319@cindex @code{vec_extract@var{m}} instruction pattern 4320@item @samp{vec_extract@var{m}} 4321Extract given field from the vector value. Operand 1 is the vector, operand 2 4322specify field index and operand 0 place to store value into. 4323 4324@cindex @code{vec_init@var{m}} instruction pattern 4325@item @samp{vec_init@var{m}} 4326Initialize the vector to given values. Operand 0 is the vector to initialize 4327and operand 1 is parallel containing values for individual fields. 4328 4329@cindex @code{vcond@var{m}@var{n}} instruction pattern 4330@item @samp{vcond@var{m}@var{n}} 4331Output a conditional vector move. Operand 0 is the destination to 4332receive a combination of operand 1 and operand 2, which are of mode @var{m}, 4333dependent on the outcome of the predicate in operand 3 which is a 4334vector comparison with operands of mode @var{n} in operands 4 and 5. The 4335modes @var{m} and @var{n} should have the same size. Operand 0 4336will be set to the value @var{op1} & @var{msk} | @var{op2} & ~@var{msk} 4337where @var{msk} is computed by element-wise evaluation of the vector 4338comparison with a truth value of all-ones and a false value of all-zeros. 4339 4340@cindex @code{vec_perm@var{m}} instruction pattern 4341@item @samp{vec_perm@var{m}} 4342Output a (variable) vector permutation. Operand 0 is the destination 4343to receive elements from operand 1 and operand 2, which are of mode 4344@var{m}. Operand 3 is the @dfn{selector}. It is an integral mode 4345vector of the same width and number of elements as mode @var{m}. 4346 4347The input elements are numbered from 0 in operand 1 through 4348@math{2*@var{N}-1} in operand 2. The elements of the selector must 4349be computed modulo @math{2*@var{N}}. Note that if 4350@code{rtx_equal_p(operand1, operand2)}, this can be implemented 4351with just operand 1 and selector elements modulo @var{N}. 4352 4353In order to make things easy for a number of targets, if there is no 4354@samp{vec_perm} pattern for mode @var{m}, but there is for mode @var{q} 4355where @var{q} is a vector of @code{QImode} of the same width as @var{m}, 4356the middle-end will lower the mode @var{m} @code{VEC_PERM_EXPR} to 4357mode @var{q}. 4358 4359@cindex @code{vec_perm_const@var{m}} instruction pattern 4360@item @samp{vec_perm_const@var{m}} 4361Like @samp{vec_perm} except that the permutation is a compile-time 4362constant. That is, operand 3, the @dfn{selector}, is a @code{CONST_VECTOR}. 4363 4364Some targets cannot perform a permutation with a variable selector, 4365but can efficiently perform a constant permutation. Further, the 4366target hook @code{vec_perm_ok} is queried to determine if the 4367specific constant permutation is available efficiently; the named 4368pattern is never expanded without @code{vec_perm_ok} returning true. 4369 4370There is no need for a target to supply both @samp{vec_perm@var{m}} 4371and @samp{vec_perm_const@var{m}} if the former can trivially implement 4372the operation with, say, the vector constant loaded into a register. 4373 4374@cindex @code{push@var{m}1} instruction pattern 4375@item @samp{push@var{m}1} 4376Output a push instruction. Operand 0 is value to push. Used only when 4377@code{PUSH_ROUNDING} is defined. For historical reason, this pattern may be 4378missing and in such case an @code{mov} expander is used instead, with a 4379@code{MEM} expression forming the push operation. The @code{mov} expander 4380method is deprecated. 4381 4382@cindex @code{add@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4383@item @samp{add@var{m}3} 4384Add operand 2 and operand 1, storing the result in operand 0. All operands 4385must have mode @var{m}. This can be used even on two-address machines, by 4386means of constraints requiring operands 1 and 0 to be the same location. 4387 4388@cindex @code{ssadd@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4389@cindex @code{usadd@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4390@cindex @code{sub@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4391@cindex @code{sssub@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4392@cindex @code{ussub@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4393@cindex @code{mul@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4394@cindex @code{ssmul@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4395@cindex @code{usmul@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4396@cindex @code{div@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4397@cindex @code{ssdiv@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4398@cindex @code{udiv@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4399@cindex @code{usdiv@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4400@cindex @code{mod@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4401@cindex @code{umod@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4402@cindex @code{umin@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4403@cindex @code{umax@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4404@cindex @code{and@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4405@cindex @code{ior@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4406@cindex @code{xor@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4407@item @samp{ssadd@var{m}3}, @samp{usadd@var{m}3} 4408@item @samp{sub@var{m}3}, @samp{sssub@var{m}3}, @samp{ussub@var{m}3} 4409@item @samp{mul@var{m}3}, @samp{ssmul@var{m}3}, @samp{usmul@var{m}3} 4410@itemx @samp{div@var{m}3}, @samp{ssdiv@var{m}3} 4411@itemx @samp{udiv@var{m}3}, @samp{usdiv@var{m}3} 4412@itemx @samp{mod@var{m}3}, @samp{umod@var{m}3} 4413@itemx @samp{umin@var{m}3}, @samp{umax@var{m}3} 4414@itemx @samp{and@var{m}3}, @samp{ior@var{m}3}, @samp{xor@var{m}3} 4415Similar, for other arithmetic operations. 4416 4417@cindex @code{fma@var{m}4} instruction pattern 4418@item @samp{fma@var{m}4} 4419Multiply operand 2 and operand 1, then add operand 3, storing the 4420result in operand 0. All operands must have mode @var{m}. This 4421pattern is used to implement the @code{fma}, @code{fmaf}, and 4422@code{fmal} builtin functions from the ISO C99 standard. The 4423@code{fma} operation may produce different results than doing the 4424multiply followed by the add if the machine does not perform a 4425rounding step between the operations. 4426 4427@cindex @code{fms@var{m}4} instruction pattern 4428@item @samp{fms@var{m}4} 4429Like @code{fma@var{m}4}, except operand 3 subtracted from the 4430product instead of added to the product. This is represented 4431in the rtl as 4432 4433@smallexample 4434(fma:@var{m} @var{op1} @var{op2} (neg:@var{m} @var{op3})) 4435@end smallexample 4436 4437@cindex @code{fnma@var{m}4} instruction pattern 4438@item @samp{fnma@var{m}4} 4439Like @code{fma@var{m}4} except that the intermediate product 4440is negated before being added to operand 3. This is represented 4441in the rtl as 4442 4443@smallexample 4444(fma:@var{m} (neg:@var{m} @var{op1}) @var{op2} @var{op3}) 4445@end smallexample 4446 4447@cindex @code{fnms@var{m}4} instruction pattern 4448@item @samp{fnms@var{m}4} 4449Like @code{fms@var{m}4} except that the intermediate product 4450is negated before subtracting operand 3. This is represented 4451in the rtl as 4452 4453@smallexample 4454(fma:@var{m} (neg:@var{m} @var{op1}) @var{op2} (neg:@var{m} @var{op3})) 4455@end smallexample 4456 4457@cindex @code{min@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4458@cindex @code{max@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4459@item @samp{smin@var{m}3}, @samp{smax@var{m}3} 4460Signed minimum and maximum operations. When used with floating point, 4461if both operands are zeros, or if either operand is @code{NaN}, then 4462it is unspecified which of the two operands is returned as the result. 4463 4464@cindex @code{reduc_smin_@var{m}} instruction pattern 4465@cindex @code{reduc_smax_@var{m}} instruction pattern 4466@item @samp{reduc_smin_@var{m}}, @samp{reduc_smax_@var{m}} 4467Find the signed minimum/maximum of the elements of a vector. The vector is 4468operand 1, and the scalar result is stored in the least significant bits of 4469operand 0 (also a vector). The output and input vector should have the same 4470modes. 4471 4472@cindex @code{reduc_umin_@var{m}} instruction pattern 4473@cindex @code{reduc_umax_@var{m}} instruction pattern 4474@item @samp{reduc_umin_@var{m}}, @samp{reduc_umax_@var{m}} 4475Find the unsigned minimum/maximum of the elements of a vector. The vector is 4476operand 1, and the scalar result is stored in the least significant bits of 4477operand 0 (also a vector). The output and input vector should have the same 4478modes. 4479 4480@cindex @code{reduc_splus_@var{m}} instruction pattern 4481@item @samp{reduc_splus_@var{m}} 4482Compute the sum of the signed elements of a vector. The vector is operand 1, 4483and the scalar result is stored in the least significant bits of operand 0 4484(also a vector). The output and input vector should have the same modes. 4485 4486@cindex @code{reduc_uplus_@var{m}} instruction pattern 4487@item @samp{reduc_uplus_@var{m}} 4488Compute the sum of the unsigned elements of a vector. The vector is operand 1, 4489and the scalar result is stored in the least significant bits of operand 0 4490(also a vector). The output and input vector should have the same modes. 4491 4492@cindex @code{sdot_prod@var{m}} instruction pattern 4493@item @samp{sdot_prod@var{m}} 4494@cindex @code{udot_prod@var{m}} instruction pattern 4495@item @samp{udot_prod@var{m}} 4496Compute the sum of the products of two signed/unsigned elements. 4497Operand 1 and operand 2 are of the same mode. Their product, which is of a 4498wider mode, is computed and added to operand 3. Operand 3 is of a mode equal or 4499wider than the mode of the product. The result is placed in operand 0, which 4500is of the same mode as operand 3. 4501 4502@cindex @code{ssum_widen@var{m3}} instruction pattern 4503@item @samp{ssum_widen@var{m3}} 4504@cindex @code{usum_widen@var{m3}} instruction pattern 4505@item @samp{usum_widen@var{m3}} 4506Operands 0 and 2 are of the same mode, which is wider than the mode of 4507operand 1. Add operand 1 to operand 2 and place the widened result in 4508operand 0. (This is used express accumulation of elements into an accumulator 4509of a wider mode.) 4510 4511@cindex @code{vec_shl_@var{m}} instruction pattern 4512@cindex @code{vec_shr_@var{m}} instruction pattern 4513@item @samp{vec_shl_@var{m}}, @samp{vec_shr_@var{m}} 4514Whole vector left/right shift in bits. 4515Operand 1 is a vector to be shifted. 4516Operand 2 is an integer shift amount in bits. 4517Operand 0 is where the resulting shifted vector is stored. 4518The output and input vectors should have the same modes. 4519 4520@cindex @code{vec_pack_trunc_@var{m}} instruction pattern 4521@item @samp{vec_pack_trunc_@var{m}} 4522Narrow (demote) and merge the elements of two vectors. Operands 1 and 2 4523are vectors of the same mode having N integral or floating point elements 4524of size S@. Operand 0 is the resulting vector in which 2*N elements of 4525size N/2 are concatenated after narrowing them down using truncation. 4526 4527@cindex @code{vec_pack_ssat_@var{m}} instruction pattern 4528@cindex @code{vec_pack_usat_@var{m}} instruction pattern 4529@item @samp{vec_pack_ssat_@var{m}}, @samp{vec_pack_usat_@var{m}} 4530Narrow (demote) and merge the elements of two vectors. Operands 1 and 2 4531are vectors of the same mode having N integral elements of size S. 4532Operand 0 is the resulting vector in which the elements of the two input 4533vectors are concatenated after narrowing them down using signed/unsigned 4534saturating arithmetic. 4535 4536@cindex @code{vec_pack_sfix_trunc_@var{m}} instruction pattern 4537@cindex @code{vec_pack_ufix_trunc_@var{m}} instruction pattern 4538@item @samp{vec_pack_sfix_trunc_@var{m}}, @samp{vec_pack_ufix_trunc_@var{m}} 4539Narrow, convert to signed/unsigned integral type and merge the elements 4540of two vectors. Operands 1 and 2 are vectors of the same mode having N 4541floating point elements of size S@. Operand 0 is the resulting vector 4542in which 2*N elements of size N/2 are concatenated. 4543 4544@cindex @code{vec_unpacks_hi_@var{m}} instruction pattern 4545@cindex @code{vec_unpacks_lo_@var{m}} instruction pattern 4546@item @samp{vec_unpacks_hi_@var{m}}, @samp{vec_unpacks_lo_@var{m}} 4547Extract and widen (promote) the high/low part of a vector of signed 4548integral or floating point elements. The input vector (operand 1) has N 4549elements of size S@. Widen (promote) the high/low elements of the vector 4550using signed or floating point extension and place the resulting N/2 4551values of size 2*S in the output vector (operand 0). 4552 4553@cindex @code{vec_unpacku_hi_@var{m}} instruction pattern 4554@cindex @code{vec_unpacku_lo_@var{m}} instruction pattern 4555@item @samp{vec_unpacku_hi_@var{m}}, @samp{vec_unpacku_lo_@var{m}} 4556Extract and widen (promote) the high/low part of a vector of unsigned 4557integral elements. The input vector (operand 1) has N elements of size S. 4558Widen (promote) the high/low elements of the vector using zero extension and 4559place the resulting N/2 values of size 2*S in the output vector (operand 0). 4560 4561@cindex @code{vec_unpacks_float_hi_@var{m}} instruction pattern 4562@cindex @code{vec_unpacks_float_lo_@var{m}} instruction pattern 4563@cindex @code{vec_unpacku_float_hi_@var{m}} instruction pattern 4564@cindex @code{vec_unpacku_float_lo_@var{m}} instruction pattern 4565@item @samp{vec_unpacks_float_hi_@var{m}}, @samp{vec_unpacks_float_lo_@var{m}} 4566@itemx @samp{vec_unpacku_float_hi_@var{m}}, @samp{vec_unpacku_float_lo_@var{m}} 4567Extract, convert to floating point type and widen the high/low part of a 4568vector of signed/unsigned integral elements. The input vector (operand 1) 4569has N elements of size S@. Convert the high/low elements of the vector using 4570floating point conversion and place the resulting N/2 values of size 2*S in 4571the output vector (operand 0). 4572 4573@cindex @code{vec_widen_umult_hi_@var{m}} instruction pattern 4574@cindex @code{vec_widen_umult_lo__@var{m}} instruction pattern 4575@cindex @code{vec_widen_smult_hi_@var{m}} instruction pattern 4576@cindex @code{vec_widen_smult_lo_@var{m}} instruction pattern 4577@item @samp{vec_widen_umult_hi_@var{m}}, @samp{vec_widen_umult_lo_@var{m}} 4578@itemx @samp{vec_widen_smult_hi_@var{m}}, @samp{vec_widen_smult_lo_@var{m}} 4579Signed/Unsigned widening multiplication. The two inputs (operands 1 and 2) 4580are vectors with N signed/unsigned elements of size S@. Multiply the high/low 4581elements of the two vectors, and put the N/2 products of size 2*S in the 4582output vector (operand 0). 4583 4584@cindex @code{vec_widen_ushiftl_hi_@var{m}} instruction pattern 4585@cindex @code{vec_widen_ushiftl_lo_@var{m}} instruction pattern 4586@cindex @code{vec_widen_sshiftl_hi_@var{m}} instruction pattern 4587@cindex @code{vec_widen_sshiftl_lo_@var{m}} instruction pattern 4588@item @samp{vec_widen_ushiftl_hi_@var{m}}, @samp{vec_widen_ushiftl_lo_@var{m}} 4589@itemx @samp{vec_widen_sshiftl_hi_@var{m}}, @samp{vec_widen_sshiftl_lo_@var{m}} 4590Signed/Unsigned widening shift left. The first input (operand 1) is a vector 4591with N signed/unsigned elements of size S@. Operand 2 is a constant. Shift 4592the high/low elements of operand 1, and put the N/2 results of size 2*S in the 4593output vector (operand 0). 4594 4595@cindex @code{mulhisi3} instruction pattern 4596@item @samp{mulhisi3} 4597Multiply operands 1 and 2, which have mode @code{HImode}, and store 4598a @code{SImode} product in operand 0. 4599 4600@cindex @code{mulqihi3} instruction pattern 4601@cindex @code{mulsidi3} instruction pattern 4602@item @samp{mulqihi3}, @samp{mulsidi3} 4603Similar widening-multiplication instructions of other widths. 4604 4605@cindex @code{umulqihi3} instruction pattern 4606@cindex @code{umulhisi3} instruction pattern 4607@cindex @code{umulsidi3} instruction pattern 4608@item @samp{umulqihi3}, @samp{umulhisi3}, @samp{umulsidi3} 4609Similar widening-multiplication instructions that do unsigned 4610multiplication. 4611 4612@cindex @code{usmulqihi3} instruction pattern 4613@cindex @code{usmulhisi3} instruction pattern 4614@cindex @code{usmulsidi3} instruction pattern 4615@item @samp{usmulqihi3}, @samp{usmulhisi3}, @samp{usmulsidi3} 4616Similar widening-multiplication instructions that interpret the first 4617operand as unsigned and the second operand as signed, then do a signed 4618multiplication. 4619 4620@cindex @code{smul@var{m}3_highpart} instruction pattern 4621@item @samp{smul@var{m}3_highpart} 4622Perform a signed multiplication of operands 1 and 2, which have mode 4623@var{m}, and store the most significant half of the product in operand 0. 4624The least significant half of the product is discarded. 4625 4626@cindex @code{umul@var{m}3_highpart} instruction pattern 4627@item @samp{umul@var{m}3_highpart} 4628Similar, but the multiplication is unsigned. 4629 4630@cindex @code{madd@var{m}@var{n}4} instruction pattern 4631@item @samp{madd@var{m}@var{n}4} 4632Multiply operands 1 and 2, sign-extend them to mode @var{n}, add 4633operand 3, and store the result in operand 0. Operands 1 and 2 4634have mode @var{m} and operands 0 and 3 have mode @var{n}. 4635Both modes must be integer or fixed-point modes and @var{n} must be twice 4636the size of @var{m}. 4637 4638In other words, @code{madd@var{m}@var{n}4} is like 4639@code{mul@var{m}@var{n}3} except that it also adds operand 3. 4640 4641These instructions are not allowed to @code{FAIL}. 4642 4643@cindex @code{umadd@var{m}@var{n}4} instruction pattern 4644@item @samp{umadd@var{m}@var{n}4} 4645Like @code{madd@var{m}@var{n}4}, but zero-extend the multiplication 4646operands instead of sign-extending them. 4647 4648@cindex @code{ssmadd@var{m}@var{n}4} instruction pattern 4649@item @samp{ssmadd@var{m}@var{n}4} 4650Like @code{madd@var{m}@var{n}4}, but all involved operations must be 4651signed-saturating. 4652 4653@cindex @code{usmadd@var{m}@var{n}4} instruction pattern 4654@item @samp{usmadd@var{m}@var{n}4} 4655Like @code{umadd@var{m}@var{n}4}, but all involved operations must be 4656unsigned-saturating. 4657 4658@cindex @code{msub@var{m}@var{n}4} instruction pattern 4659@item @samp{msub@var{m}@var{n}4} 4660Multiply operands 1 and 2, sign-extend them to mode @var{n}, subtract the 4661result from operand 3, and store the result in operand 0. Operands 1 and 2 4662have mode @var{m} and operands 0 and 3 have mode @var{n}. 4663Both modes must be integer or fixed-point modes and @var{n} must be twice 4664the size of @var{m}. 4665 4666In other words, @code{msub@var{m}@var{n}4} is like 4667@code{mul@var{m}@var{n}3} except that it also subtracts the result 4668from operand 3. 4669 4670These instructions are not allowed to @code{FAIL}. 4671 4672@cindex @code{umsub@var{m}@var{n}4} instruction pattern 4673@item @samp{umsub@var{m}@var{n}4} 4674Like @code{msub@var{m}@var{n}4}, but zero-extend the multiplication 4675operands instead of sign-extending them. 4676 4677@cindex @code{ssmsub@var{m}@var{n}4} instruction pattern 4678@item @samp{ssmsub@var{m}@var{n}4} 4679Like @code{msub@var{m}@var{n}4}, but all involved operations must be 4680signed-saturating. 4681 4682@cindex @code{usmsub@var{m}@var{n}4} instruction pattern 4683@item @samp{usmsub@var{m}@var{n}4} 4684Like @code{umsub@var{m}@var{n}4}, but all involved operations must be 4685unsigned-saturating. 4686 4687@cindex @code{divmod@var{m}4} instruction pattern 4688@item @samp{divmod@var{m}4} 4689Signed division that produces both a quotient and a remainder. 4690Operand 1 is divided by operand 2 to produce a quotient stored 4691in operand 0 and a remainder stored in operand 3. 4692 4693For machines with an instruction that produces both a quotient and a 4694remainder, provide a pattern for @samp{divmod@var{m}4} but do not 4695provide patterns for @samp{div@var{m}3} and @samp{mod@var{m}3}. This 4696allows optimization in the relatively common case when both the quotient 4697and remainder are computed. 4698 4699If an instruction that just produces a quotient or just a remainder 4700exists and is more efficient than the instruction that produces both, 4701write the output routine of @samp{divmod@var{m}4} to call 4702@code{find_reg_note} and look for a @code{REG_UNUSED} note on the 4703quotient or remainder and generate the appropriate instruction. 4704 4705@cindex @code{udivmod@var{m}4} instruction pattern 4706@item @samp{udivmod@var{m}4} 4707Similar, but does unsigned division. 4708 4709@anchor{shift patterns} 4710@cindex @code{ashl@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4711@cindex @code{ssashl@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4712@cindex @code{usashl@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4713@item @samp{ashl@var{m}3}, @samp{ssashl@var{m}3}, @samp{usashl@var{m}3} 4714Arithmetic-shift operand 1 left by a number of bits specified by operand 47152, and store the result in operand 0. Here @var{m} is the mode of 4716operand 0 and operand 1; operand 2's mode is specified by the 4717instruction pattern, and the compiler will convert the operand to that 4718mode before generating the instruction. The meaning of out-of-range shift 4719counts can optionally be specified by @code{TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK}. 4720@xref{TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK}. Operand 2 is always a scalar type. 4721 4722@cindex @code{ashr@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4723@cindex @code{lshr@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4724@cindex @code{rotl@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4725@cindex @code{rotr@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4726@item @samp{ashr@var{m}3}, @samp{lshr@var{m}3}, @samp{rotl@var{m}3}, @samp{rotr@var{m}3} 4727Other shift and rotate instructions, analogous to the 4728@code{ashl@var{m}3} instructions. Operand 2 is always a scalar type. 4729 4730@cindex @code{vashl@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4731@cindex @code{vashr@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4732@cindex @code{vlshr@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4733@cindex @code{vrotl@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4734@cindex @code{vrotr@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4735@item @samp{vashl@var{m}3}, @samp{vashr@var{m}3}, @samp{vlshr@var{m}3}, @samp{vrotl@var{m}3}, @samp{vrotr@var{m}3} 4736Vector shift and rotate instructions that take vectors as operand 2 4737instead of a scalar type. 4738 4739@cindex @code{neg@var{m}2} instruction pattern 4740@cindex @code{ssneg@var{m}2} instruction pattern 4741@cindex @code{usneg@var{m}2} instruction pattern 4742@item @samp{neg@var{m}2}, @samp{ssneg@var{m}2}, @samp{usneg@var{m}2} 4743Negate operand 1 and store the result in operand 0. 4744 4745@cindex @code{abs@var{m}2} instruction pattern 4746@item @samp{abs@var{m}2} 4747Store the absolute value of operand 1 into operand 0. 4748 4749@cindex @code{sqrt@var{m}2} instruction pattern 4750@item @samp{sqrt@var{m}2} 4751Store the square root of operand 1 into operand 0. 4752 4753The @code{sqrt} built-in function of C always uses the mode which 4754corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{sqrtf} 4755built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data 4756type @code{float}. 4757 4758@cindex @code{fmod@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4759@item @samp{fmod@var{m}3} 4760Store the remainder of dividing operand 1 by operand 2 into 4761operand 0, rounded towards zero to an integer. 4762 4763The @code{fmod} built-in function of C always uses the mode which 4764corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{fmodf} 4765built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data 4766type @code{float}. 4767 4768@cindex @code{remainder@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4769@item @samp{remainder@var{m}3} 4770Store the remainder of dividing operand 1 by operand 2 into 4771operand 0, rounded to the nearest integer. 4772 4773The @code{remainder} built-in function of C always uses the mode 4774which corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the 4775@code{remainderf} built-in function uses the mode which corresponds 4776to the C data type @code{float}. 4777 4778@cindex @code{cos@var{m}2} instruction pattern 4779@item @samp{cos@var{m}2} 4780Store the cosine of operand 1 into operand 0. 4781 4782The @code{cos} built-in function of C always uses the mode which 4783corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{cosf} 4784built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data 4785type @code{float}. 4786 4787@cindex @code{sin@var{m}2} instruction pattern 4788@item @samp{sin@var{m}2} 4789Store the sine of operand 1 into operand 0. 4790 4791The @code{sin} built-in function of C always uses the mode which 4792corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{sinf} 4793built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data 4794type @code{float}. 4795 4796@cindex @code{exp@var{m}2} instruction pattern 4797@item @samp{exp@var{m}2} 4798Store the exponential of operand 1 into operand 0. 4799 4800The @code{exp} built-in function of C always uses the mode which 4801corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{expf} 4802built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data 4803type @code{float}. 4804 4805@cindex @code{log@var{m}2} instruction pattern 4806@item @samp{log@var{m}2} 4807Store the natural logarithm of operand 1 into operand 0. 4808 4809The @code{log} built-in function of C always uses the mode which 4810corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{logf} 4811built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data 4812type @code{float}. 4813 4814@cindex @code{pow@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4815@item @samp{pow@var{m}3} 4816Store the value of operand 1 raised to the exponent operand 2 4817into operand 0. 4818 4819The @code{pow} built-in function of C always uses the mode which 4820corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{powf} 4821built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data 4822type @code{float}. 4823 4824@cindex @code{atan2@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4825@item @samp{atan2@var{m}3} 4826Store the arc tangent (inverse tangent) of operand 1 divided by 4827operand 2 into operand 0, using the signs of both arguments to 4828determine the quadrant of the result. 4829 4830The @code{atan2} built-in function of C always uses the mode which 4831corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{atan2f} 4832built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data 4833type @code{float}. 4834 4835@cindex @code{floor@var{m}2} instruction pattern 4836@item @samp{floor@var{m}2} 4837Store the largest integral value not greater than argument. 4838 4839The @code{floor} built-in function of C always uses the mode which 4840corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{floorf} 4841built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data 4842type @code{float}. 4843 4844@cindex @code{btrunc@var{m}2} instruction pattern 4845@item @samp{btrunc@var{m}2} 4846Store the argument rounded to integer towards zero. 4847 4848The @code{trunc} built-in function of C always uses the mode which 4849corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{truncf} 4850built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data 4851type @code{float}. 4852 4853@cindex @code{round@var{m}2} instruction pattern 4854@item @samp{round@var{m}2} 4855Store the argument rounded to integer away from zero. 4856 4857The @code{round} built-in function of C always uses the mode which 4858corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{roundf} 4859built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data 4860type @code{float}. 4861 4862@cindex @code{ceil@var{m}2} instruction pattern 4863@item @samp{ceil@var{m}2} 4864Store the argument rounded to integer away from zero. 4865 4866The @code{ceil} built-in function of C always uses the mode which 4867corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{ceilf} 4868built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data 4869type @code{float}. 4870 4871@cindex @code{nearbyint@var{m}2} instruction pattern 4872@item @samp{nearbyint@var{m}2} 4873Store the argument rounded according to the default rounding mode 4874 4875The @code{nearbyint} built-in function of C always uses the mode which 4876corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{nearbyintf} 4877built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data 4878type @code{float}. 4879 4880@cindex @code{rint@var{m}2} instruction pattern 4881@item @samp{rint@var{m}2} 4882Store the argument rounded according to the default rounding mode and 4883raise the inexact exception when the result differs in value from 4884the argument 4885 4886The @code{rint} built-in function of C always uses the mode which 4887corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{rintf} 4888built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data 4889type @code{float}. 4890 4891@cindex @code{lrint@var{m}@var{n}2} 4892@item @samp{lrint@var{m}@var{n}2} 4893Convert operand 1 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}) to fixed 4894point mode @var{n} as a signed number according to the current 4895rounding mode and store in operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}). 4896 4897@cindex @code{lround@var{m}@var{n}2} 4898@item @samp{lround@var{m}@var{n}2} 4899Convert operand 1 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}) to fixed 4900point mode @var{n} as a signed number rounding to nearest and away 4901from zero and store in operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}). 4902 4903@cindex @code{lfloor@var{m}@var{n}2} 4904@item @samp{lfloor@var{m}@var{n}2} 4905Convert operand 1 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}) to fixed 4906point mode @var{n} as a signed number rounding down and store in 4907operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}). 4908 4909@cindex @code{lceil@var{m}@var{n}2} 4910@item @samp{lceil@var{m}@var{n}2} 4911Convert operand 1 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}) to fixed 4912point mode @var{n} as a signed number rounding up and store in 4913operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}). 4914 4915@cindex @code{copysign@var{m}3} instruction pattern 4916@item @samp{copysign@var{m}3} 4917Store a value with the magnitude of operand 1 and the sign of operand 49182 into operand 0. 4919 4920The @code{copysign} built-in function of C always uses the mode which 4921corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{copysignf} 4922built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data 4923type @code{float}. 4924 4925@cindex @code{ffs@var{m}2} instruction pattern 4926@item @samp{ffs@var{m}2} 4927Store into operand 0 one plus the index of the least significant 1-bit 4928of operand 1. If operand 1 is zero, store zero. @var{m} is the mode 4929of operand 0; operand 1's mode is specified by the instruction 4930pattern, and the compiler will convert the operand to that mode before 4931generating the instruction. 4932 4933The @code{ffs} built-in function of C always uses the mode which 4934corresponds to the C data type @code{int}. 4935 4936@cindex @code{clz@var{m}2} instruction pattern 4937@item @samp{clz@var{m}2} 4938Store into operand 0 the number of leading 0-bits in @var{x}, starting 4939at the most significant bit position. If @var{x} is 0, the 4940@code{CLZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO} (@pxref{Misc}) macro defines if 4941the result is undefined or has a useful value. 4942@var{m} is the mode of operand 0; operand 1's mode is 4943specified by the instruction pattern, and the compiler will convert the 4944operand to that mode before generating the instruction. 4945 4946@cindex @code{ctz@var{m}2} instruction pattern 4947@item @samp{ctz@var{m}2} 4948Store into operand 0 the number of trailing 0-bits in @var{x}, starting 4949at the least significant bit position. If @var{x} is 0, the 4950@code{CTZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO} (@pxref{Misc}) macro defines if 4951the result is undefined or has a useful value. 4952@var{m} is the mode of operand 0; operand 1's mode is 4953specified by the instruction pattern, and the compiler will convert the 4954operand to that mode before generating the instruction. 4955 4956@cindex @code{popcount@var{m}2} instruction pattern 4957@item @samp{popcount@var{m}2} 4958Store into operand 0 the number of 1-bits in @var{x}. @var{m} is the 4959mode of operand 0; operand 1's mode is specified by the instruction 4960pattern, and the compiler will convert the operand to that mode before 4961generating the instruction. 4962 4963@cindex @code{parity@var{m}2} instruction pattern 4964@item @samp{parity@var{m}2} 4965Store into operand 0 the parity of @var{x}, i.e.@: the number of 1-bits 4966in @var{x} modulo 2. @var{m} is the mode of operand 0; operand 1's mode 4967is specified by the instruction pattern, and the compiler will convert 4968the operand to that mode before generating the instruction. 4969 4970@cindex @code{one_cmpl@var{m}2} instruction pattern 4971@item @samp{one_cmpl@var{m}2} 4972Store the bitwise-complement of operand 1 into operand 0. 4973 4974@cindex @code{movmem@var{m}} instruction pattern 4975@item @samp{movmem@var{m}} 4976Block move instruction. The destination and source blocks of memory 4977are the first two operands, and both are @code{mem:BLK}s with an 4978address in mode @code{Pmode}. 4979 4980The number of bytes to move is the third operand, in mode @var{m}. 4981Usually, you specify @code{word_mode} for @var{m}. However, if you can 4982generate better code knowing the range of valid lengths is smaller than 4983those representable in a full word, you should provide a pattern with a 4984mode corresponding to the range of values you can handle efficiently 4985(e.g., @code{QImode} for values in the range 0--127; note we avoid numbers 4986that appear negative) and also a pattern with @code{word_mode}. 4987 4988The fourth operand is the known shared alignment of the source and 4989destination, in the form of a @code{const_int} rtx. Thus, if the 4990compiler knows that both source and destination are word-aligned, 4991it may provide the value 4 for this operand. 4992 4993Optional operands 5 and 6 specify expected alignment and size of block 4994respectively. The expected alignment differs from alignment in operand 4 4995in a way that the blocks are not required to be aligned according to it in 4996all cases. This expected alignment is also in bytes, just like operand 4. 4997Expected size, when unknown, is set to @code{(const_int -1)}. 4998 4999Descriptions of multiple @code{movmem@var{m}} patterns can only be 5000beneficial if the patterns for smaller modes have fewer restrictions 5001on their first, second and fourth operands. Note that the mode @var{m} 5002in @code{movmem@var{m}} does not impose any restriction on the mode of 5003individually moved data units in the block. 5004 5005These patterns need not give special consideration to the possibility 5006that the source and destination strings might overlap. 5007 5008@cindex @code{movstr} instruction pattern 5009@item @samp{movstr} 5010String copy instruction, with @code{stpcpy} semantics. Operand 0 is 5011an output operand in mode @code{Pmode}. The addresses of the 5012destination and source strings are operands 1 and 2, and both are 5013@code{mem:BLK}s with addresses in mode @code{Pmode}. The execution of 5014the expansion of this pattern should store in operand 0 the address in 5015which the @code{NUL} terminator was stored in the destination string. 5016 5017@cindex @code{setmem@var{m}} instruction pattern 5018@item @samp{setmem@var{m}} 5019Block set instruction. The destination string is the first operand, 5020given as a @code{mem:BLK} whose address is in mode @code{Pmode}. The 5021number of bytes to set is the second operand, in mode @var{m}. The value to 5022initialize the memory with is the third operand. Targets that only support the 5023clearing of memory should reject any value that is not the constant 0. See 5024@samp{movmem@var{m}} for a discussion of the choice of mode. 5025 5026The fourth operand is the known alignment of the destination, in the form 5027of a @code{const_int} rtx. Thus, if the compiler knows that the 5028destination is word-aligned, it may provide the value 4 for this 5029operand. 5030 5031Optional operands 5 and 6 specify expected alignment and size of block 5032respectively. The expected alignment differs from alignment in operand 4 5033in a way that the blocks are not required to be aligned according to it in 5034all cases. This expected alignment is also in bytes, just like operand 4. 5035Expected size, when unknown, is set to @code{(const_int -1)}. 5036 5037The use for multiple @code{setmem@var{m}} is as for @code{movmem@var{m}}. 5038 5039@cindex @code{cmpstrn@var{m}} instruction pattern 5040@item @samp{cmpstrn@var{m}} 5041String compare instruction, with five operands. Operand 0 is the output; 5042it has mode @var{m}. The remaining four operands are like the operands 5043of @samp{movmem@var{m}}. The two memory blocks specified are compared 5044byte by byte in lexicographic order starting at the beginning of each 5045string. The instruction is not allowed to prefetch more than one byte 5046at a time since either string may end in the first byte and reading past 5047that may access an invalid page or segment and cause a fault. The 5048comparison terminates early if the fetched bytes are different or if 5049they are equal to zero. The effect of the instruction is to store a 5050value in operand 0 whose sign indicates the result of the comparison. 5051 5052@cindex @code{cmpstr@var{m}} instruction pattern 5053@item @samp{cmpstr@var{m}} 5054String compare instruction, without known maximum length. Operand 0 is the 5055output; it has mode @var{m}. The second and third operand are the blocks of 5056memory to be compared; both are @code{mem:BLK} with an address in mode 5057@code{Pmode}. 5058 5059The fourth operand is the known shared alignment of the source and 5060destination, in the form of a @code{const_int} rtx. Thus, if the 5061compiler knows that both source and destination are word-aligned, 5062it may provide the value 4 for this operand. 5063 5064The two memory blocks specified are compared byte by byte in lexicographic 5065order starting at the beginning of each string. The instruction is not allowed 5066to prefetch more than one byte at a time since either string may end in the 5067first byte and reading past that may access an invalid page or segment and 5068cause a fault. The comparison will terminate when the fetched bytes 5069are different or if they are equal to zero. The effect of the 5070instruction is to store a value in operand 0 whose sign indicates the 5071result of the comparison. 5072 5073@cindex @code{cmpmem@var{m}} instruction pattern 5074@item @samp{cmpmem@var{m}} 5075Block compare instruction, with five operands like the operands 5076of @samp{cmpstr@var{m}}. The two memory blocks specified are compared 5077byte by byte in lexicographic order starting at the beginning of each 5078block. Unlike @samp{cmpstr@var{m}} the instruction can prefetch 5079any bytes in the two memory blocks. Also unlike @samp{cmpstr@var{m}} 5080the comparison will not stop if both bytes are zero. The effect of 5081the instruction is to store a value in operand 0 whose sign indicates 5082the result of the comparison. 5083 5084@cindex @code{strlen@var{m}} instruction pattern 5085@item @samp{strlen@var{m}} 5086Compute the length of a string, with three operands. 5087Operand 0 is the result (of mode @var{m}), operand 1 is 5088a @code{mem} referring to the first character of the string, 5089operand 2 is the character to search for (normally zero), 5090and operand 3 is a constant describing the known alignment 5091of the beginning of the string. 5092 5093@cindex @code{float@var{m}@var{n}2} instruction pattern 5094@item @samp{float@var{m}@var{n}2} 5095Convert signed integer operand 1 (valid for fixed point mode @var{m}) to 5096floating point mode @var{n} and store in operand 0 (which has mode 5097@var{n}). 5098 5099@cindex @code{floatuns@var{m}@var{n}2} instruction pattern 5100@item @samp{floatuns@var{m}@var{n}2} 5101Convert unsigned integer operand 1 (valid for fixed point mode @var{m}) 5102to floating point mode @var{n} and store in operand 0 (which has mode 5103@var{n}). 5104 5105@cindex @code{fix@var{m}@var{n}2} instruction pattern 5106@item @samp{fix@var{m}@var{n}2} 5107Convert operand 1 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}) to fixed 5108point mode @var{n} as a signed number and store in operand 0 (which 5109has mode @var{n}). This instruction's result is defined only when 5110the value of operand 1 is an integer. 5111 5112If the machine description defines this pattern, it also needs to 5113define the @code{ftrunc} pattern. 5114 5115@cindex @code{fixuns@var{m}@var{n}2} instruction pattern 5116@item @samp{fixuns@var{m}@var{n}2} 5117Convert operand 1 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}) to fixed 5118point mode @var{n} as an unsigned number and store in operand 0 (which 5119has mode @var{n}). This instruction's result is defined only when the 5120value of operand 1 is an integer. 5121 5122@cindex @code{ftrunc@var{m}2} instruction pattern 5123@item @samp{ftrunc@var{m}2} 5124Convert operand 1 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}) to an 5125integer value, still represented in floating point mode @var{m}, and 5126store it in operand 0 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}). 5127 5128@cindex @code{fix_trunc@var{m}@var{n}2} instruction pattern 5129@item @samp{fix_trunc@var{m}@var{n}2} 5130Like @samp{fix@var{m}@var{n}2} but works for any floating point value 5131of mode @var{m} by converting the value to an integer. 5132 5133@cindex @code{fixuns_trunc@var{m}@var{n}2} instruction pattern 5134@item @samp{fixuns_trunc@var{m}@var{n}2} 5135Like @samp{fixuns@var{m}@var{n}2} but works for any floating point 5136value of mode @var{m} by converting the value to an integer. 5137 5138@cindex @code{trunc@var{m}@var{n}2} instruction pattern 5139@item @samp{trunc@var{m}@var{n}2} 5140Truncate operand 1 (valid for mode @var{m}) to mode @var{n} and 5141store in operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}). Both modes must be fixed 5142point or both floating point. 5143 5144@cindex @code{extend@var{m}@var{n}2} instruction pattern 5145@item @samp{extend@var{m}@var{n}2} 5146Sign-extend operand 1 (valid for mode @var{m}) to mode @var{n} and 5147store in operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}). Both modes must be fixed 5148point or both floating point. 5149 5150@cindex @code{zero_extend@var{m}@var{n}2} instruction pattern 5151@item @samp{zero_extend@var{m}@var{n}2} 5152Zero-extend operand 1 (valid for mode @var{m}) to mode @var{n} and 5153store in operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}). Both modes must be fixed 5154point. 5155 5156@cindex @code{fract@var{m}@var{n}2} instruction pattern 5157@item @samp{fract@var{m}@var{n}2} 5158Convert operand 1 of mode @var{m} to mode @var{n} and store in 5159operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}). Mode @var{m} and mode @var{n} 5160could be fixed-point to fixed-point, signed integer to fixed-point, 5161fixed-point to signed integer, floating-point to fixed-point, 5162or fixed-point to floating-point. 5163When overflows or underflows happen, the results are undefined. 5164 5165@cindex @code{satfract@var{m}@var{n}2} instruction pattern 5166@item @samp{satfract@var{m}@var{n}2} 5167Convert operand 1 of mode @var{m} to mode @var{n} and store in 5168operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}). Mode @var{m} and mode @var{n} 5169could be fixed-point to fixed-point, signed integer to fixed-point, 5170or floating-point to fixed-point. 5171When overflows or underflows happen, the instruction saturates the 5172results to the maximum or the minimum. 5173 5174@cindex @code{fractuns@var{m}@var{n}2} instruction pattern 5175@item @samp{fractuns@var{m}@var{n}2} 5176Convert operand 1 of mode @var{m} to mode @var{n} and store in 5177operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}). Mode @var{m} and mode @var{n} 5178could be unsigned integer to fixed-point, or 5179fixed-point to unsigned integer. 5180When overflows or underflows happen, the results are undefined. 5181 5182@cindex @code{satfractuns@var{m}@var{n}2} instruction pattern 5183@item @samp{satfractuns@var{m}@var{n}2} 5184Convert unsigned integer operand 1 of mode @var{m} to fixed-point mode 5185@var{n} and store in operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}). 5186When overflows or underflows happen, the instruction saturates the 5187results to the maximum or the minimum. 5188 5189@cindex @code{extv} instruction pattern 5190@item @samp{extv} 5191Extract a bit-field from operand 1 (a register or memory operand), where 5192operand 2 specifies the width in bits and operand 3 the starting bit, 5193and store it in operand 0. Operand 0 must have mode @code{word_mode}. 5194Operand 1 may have mode @code{byte_mode} or @code{word_mode}; often 5195@code{word_mode} is allowed only for registers. Operands 2 and 3 must 5196be valid for @code{word_mode}. 5197 5198The RTL generation pass generates this instruction only with constants 5199for operands 2 and 3 and the constant is never zero for operand 2. 5200 5201The bit-field value is sign-extended to a full word integer 5202before it is stored in operand 0. 5203 5204@cindex @code{extzv} instruction pattern 5205@item @samp{extzv} 5206Like @samp{extv} except that the bit-field value is zero-extended. 5207 5208@cindex @code{insv} instruction pattern 5209@item @samp{insv} 5210Store operand 3 (which must be valid for @code{word_mode}) into a 5211bit-field in operand 0, where operand 1 specifies the width in bits and 5212operand 2 the starting bit. Operand 0 may have mode @code{byte_mode} or 5213@code{word_mode}; often @code{word_mode} is allowed only for registers. 5214Operands 1 and 2 must be valid for @code{word_mode}. 5215 5216The RTL generation pass generates this instruction only with constants 5217for operands 1 and 2 and the constant is never zero for operand 1. 5218 5219@cindex @code{mov@var{mode}cc} instruction pattern 5220@item @samp{mov@var{mode}cc} 5221Conditionally move operand 2 or operand 3 into operand 0 according to the 5222comparison in operand 1. If the comparison is true, operand 2 is moved 5223into operand 0, otherwise operand 3 is moved. 5224 5225The mode of the operands being compared need not be the same as the operands 5226being moved. Some machines, sparc64 for example, have instructions that 5227conditionally move an integer value based on the floating point condition 5228codes and vice versa. 5229 5230If the machine does not have conditional move instructions, do not 5231define these patterns. 5232 5233@cindex @code{add@var{mode}cc} instruction pattern 5234@item @samp{add@var{mode}cc} 5235Similar to @samp{mov@var{mode}cc} but for conditional addition. Conditionally 5236move operand 2 or (operands 2 + operand 3) into operand 0 according to the 5237comparison in operand 1. If the comparison is true, operand 2 is moved into 5238operand 0, otherwise (operand 2 + operand 3) is moved. 5239 5240@cindex @code{cstore@var{mode}4} instruction pattern 5241@item @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} 5242Store zero or nonzero in operand 0 according to whether a comparison 5243is true. Operand 1 is a comparison operator. Operand 2 and operand 3 5244are the first and second operand of the comparison, respectively. 5245You specify the mode that operand 0 must have when you write the 5246@code{match_operand} expression. The compiler automatically sees which 5247mode you have used and supplies an operand of that mode. 5248 5249The value stored for a true condition must have 1 as its low bit, or 5250else must be negative. Otherwise the instruction is not suitable and 5251you should omit it from the machine description. You describe to the 5252compiler exactly which value is stored by defining the macro 5253@code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} (@pxref{Misc}). If a description cannot be 5254found that can be used for all the possible comparison operators, you 5255should pick one and use a @code{define_expand} to map all results 5256onto the one you chose. 5257 5258These operations may @code{FAIL}, but should do so only in relatively 5259uncommon cases; if they would @code{FAIL} for common cases involving 5260integer comparisons, it is best to restrict the predicates to not 5261allow these operands. Likewise if a given comparison operator will 5262always fail, independent of the operands (for floating-point modes, the 5263@code{ordered_comparison_operator} predicate is often useful in this case). 5264 5265If this pattern is omitted, the compiler will generate a conditional 5266branch---for example, it may copy a constant one to the target and branching 5267around an assignment of zero to the target---or a libcall. If the predicate 5268for operand 1 only rejects some operators, it will also try reordering the 5269operands and/or inverting the result value (e.g.@: by an exclusive OR). 5270These possibilities could be cheaper or equivalent to the instructions 5271used for the @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} pattern followed by those required 5272to convert a positive result from @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} to 1; in this 5273case, you can and should make operand 1's predicate reject some operators 5274in the @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} pattern, or remove the pattern altogether 5275from the machine description. 5276 5277@cindex @code{cbranch@var{mode}4} instruction pattern 5278@item @samp{cbranch@var{mode}4} 5279Conditional branch instruction combined with a compare instruction. 5280Operand 0 is a comparison operator. Operand 1 and operand 2 are the 5281first and second operands of the comparison, respectively. Operand 3 5282is a @code{label_ref} that refers to the label to jump to. 5283 5284@cindex @code{jump} instruction pattern 5285@item @samp{jump} 5286A jump inside a function; an unconditional branch. Operand 0 is the 5287@code{label_ref} of the label to jump to. This pattern name is mandatory 5288on all machines. 5289 5290@cindex @code{call} instruction pattern 5291@item @samp{call} 5292Subroutine call instruction returning no value. Operand 0 is the 5293function to call; operand 1 is the number of bytes of arguments pushed 5294as a @code{const_int}; operand 2 is the number of registers used as 5295operands. 5296 5297On most machines, operand 2 is not actually stored into the RTL 5298pattern. It is supplied for the sake of some RISC machines which need 5299to put this information into the assembler code; they can put it in 5300the RTL instead of operand 1. 5301 5302Operand 0 should be a @code{mem} RTX whose address is the address of the 5303function. Note, however, that this address can be a @code{symbol_ref} 5304expression even if it would not be a legitimate memory address on the 5305target machine. If it is also not a valid argument for a call 5306instruction, the pattern for this operation should be a 5307@code{define_expand} (@pxref{Expander Definitions}) that places the 5308address into a register and uses that register in the call instruction. 5309 5310@cindex @code{call_value} instruction pattern 5311@item @samp{call_value} 5312Subroutine call instruction returning a value. Operand 0 is the hard 5313register in which the value is returned. There are three more 5314operands, the same as the three operands of the @samp{call} 5315instruction (but with numbers increased by one). 5316 5317Subroutines that return @code{BLKmode} objects use the @samp{call} 5318insn. 5319 5320@cindex @code{call_pop} instruction pattern 5321@cindex @code{call_value_pop} instruction pattern 5322@item @samp{call_pop}, @samp{call_value_pop} 5323Similar to @samp{call} and @samp{call_value}, except used if defined and 5324if @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} is nonzero. They should emit a @code{parallel} 5325that contains both the function call and a @code{set} to indicate the 5326adjustment made to the frame pointer. 5327 5328For machines where @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} can be nonzero, the use of these 5329patterns increases the number of functions for which the frame pointer 5330can be eliminated, if desired. 5331 5332@cindex @code{untyped_call} instruction pattern 5333@item @samp{untyped_call} 5334Subroutine call instruction returning a value of any type. Operand 0 is 5335the function to call; operand 1 is a memory location where the result of 5336calling the function is to be stored; operand 2 is a @code{parallel} 5337expression where each element is a @code{set} expression that indicates 5338the saving of a function return value into the result block. 5339 5340This instruction pattern should be defined to support 5341@code{__builtin_apply} on machines where special instructions are needed 5342to call a subroutine with arbitrary arguments or to save the value 5343returned. This instruction pattern is required on machines that have 5344multiple registers that can hold a return value 5345(i.e.@: @code{FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P} is true for more than one register). 5346 5347@cindex @code{return} instruction pattern 5348@item @samp{return} 5349Subroutine return instruction. This instruction pattern name should be 5350defined only if a single instruction can do all the work of returning 5351from a function. 5352 5353Like the @samp{mov@var{m}} patterns, this pattern is also used after the 5354RTL generation phase. In this case it is to support machines where 5355multiple instructions are usually needed to return from a function, but 5356some class of functions only requires one instruction to implement a 5357return. Normally, the applicable functions are those which do not need 5358to save any registers or allocate stack space. 5359 5360It is valid for this pattern to expand to an instruction using 5361@code{simple_return} if no epilogue is required. 5362 5363@cindex @code{simple_return} instruction pattern 5364@item @samp{simple_return} 5365Subroutine return instruction. This instruction pattern name should be 5366defined only if a single instruction can do all the work of returning 5367from a function on a path where no epilogue is required. This pattern 5368is very similar to the @code{return} instruction pattern, but it is emitted 5369only by the shrink-wrapping optimization on paths where the function 5370prologue has not been executed, and a function return should occur without 5371any of the effects of the epilogue. Additional uses may be introduced on 5372paths where both the prologue and the epilogue have executed. 5373 5374@findex reload_completed 5375@findex leaf_function_p 5376For such machines, the condition specified in this pattern should only 5377be true when @code{reload_completed} is nonzero and the function's 5378epilogue would only be a single instruction. For machines with register 5379windows, the routine @code{leaf_function_p} may be used to determine if 5380a register window push is required. 5381 5382Machines that have conditional return instructions should define patterns 5383such as 5384 5385@smallexample 5386(define_insn "" 5387 [(set (pc) 5388 (if_then_else (match_operator 5389 0 "comparison_operator" 5390 [(cc0) (const_int 0)]) 5391 (return) 5392 (pc)))] 5393 "@var{condition}" 5394 "@dots{}") 5395@end smallexample 5396 5397where @var{condition} would normally be the same condition specified on the 5398named @samp{return} pattern. 5399 5400@cindex @code{untyped_return} instruction pattern 5401@item @samp{untyped_return} 5402Untyped subroutine return instruction. This instruction pattern should 5403be defined to support @code{__builtin_return} on machines where special 5404instructions are needed to return a value of any type. 5405 5406Operand 0 is a memory location where the result of calling a function 5407with @code{__builtin_apply} is stored; operand 1 is a @code{parallel} 5408expression where each element is a @code{set} expression that indicates 5409the restoring of a function return value from the result block. 5410 5411@cindex @code{nop} instruction pattern 5412@item @samp{nop} 5413No-op instruction. This instruction pattern name should always be defined 5414to output a no-op in assembler code. @code{(const_int 0)} will do as an 5415RTL pattern. 5416 5417@cindex @code{indirect_jump} instruction pattern 5418@item @samp{indirect_jump} 5419An instruction to jump to an address which is operand zero. 5420This pattern name is mandatory on all machines. 5421 5422@cindex @code{casesi} instruction pattern 5423@item @samp{casesi} 5424Instruction to jump through a dispatch table, including bounds checking. 5425This instruction takes five operands: 5426 5427@enumerate 5428@item 5429The index to dispatch on, which has mode @code{SImode}. 5430 5431@item 5432The lower bound for indices in the table, an integer constant. 5433 5434@item 5435The total range of indices in the table---the largest index 5436minus the smallest one (both inclusive). 5437 5438@item 5439A label that precedes the table itself. 5440 5441@item 5442A label to jump to if the index has a value outside the bounds. 5443@end enumerate 5444 5445The table is an @code{addr_vec} or @code{addr_diff_vec} inside of a 5446@code{jump_insn}. The number of elements in the table is one plus the 5447difference between the upper bound and the lower bound. 5448 5449@cindex @code{tablejump} instruction pattern 5450@item @samp{tablejump} 5451Instruction to jump to a variable address. This is a low-level 5452capability which can be used to implement a dispatch table when there 5453is no @samp{casesi} pattern. 5454 5455This pattern requires two operands: the address or offset, and a label 5456which should immediately precede the jump table. If the macro 5457@code{CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE} evaluates to a nonzero value then the first 5458operand is an offset which counts from the address of the table; otherwise, 5459it is an absolute address to jump to. In either case, the first operand has 5460mode @code{Pmode}. 5461 5462The @samp{tablejump} insn is always the last insn before the jump 5463table it uses. Its assembler code normally has no need to use the 5464second operand, but you should incorporate it in the RTL pattern so 5465that the jump optimizer will not delete the table as unreachable code. 5466 5467 5468@cindex @code{decrement_and_branch_until_zero} instruction pattern 5469@item @samp{decrement_and_branch_until_zero} 5470Conditional branch instruction that decrements a register and 5471jumps if the register is nonzero. Operand 0 is the register to 5472decrement and test; operand 1 is the label to jump to if the 5473register is nonzero. @xref{Looping Patterns}. 5474 5475This optional instruction pattern is only used by the combiner, 5476typically for loops reversed by the loop optimizer when strength 5477reduction is enabled. 5478 5479@cindex @code{doloop_end} instruction pattern 5480@item @samp{doloop_end} 5481Conditional branch instruction that decrements a register and jumps if 5482the register is nonzero. This instruction takes five operands: Operand 54830 is the register to decrement and test; operand 1 is the number of loop 5484iterations as a @code{const_int} or @code{const0_rtx} if this cannot be 5485determined until run-time; operand 2 is the actual or estimated maximum 5486number of iterations as a @code{const_int}; operand 3 is the number of 5487enclosed loops as a @code{const_int} (an innermost loop has a value of 54881); operand 4 is the label to jump to if the register is nonzero. 5489@xref{Looping Patterns}. 5490 5491This optional instruction pattern should be defined for machines with 5492low-overhead looping instructions as the loop optimizer will try to 5493modify suitable loops to utilize it. If nested low-overhead looping is 5494not supported, use a @code{define_expand} (@pxref{Expander Definitions}) 5495and make the pattern fail if operand 3 is not @code{const1_rtx}. 5496Similarly, if the actual or estimated maximum number of iterations is 5497too large for this instruction, make it fail. 5498 5499@cindex @code{doloop_begin} instruction pattern 5500@item @samp{doloop_begin} 5501Companion instruction to @code{doloop_end} required for machines that 5502need to perform some initialization, such as loading special registers 5503used by a low-overhead looping instruction. If initialization insns do 5504not always need to be emitted, use a @code{define_expand} 5505(@pxref{Expander Definitions}) and make it fail. 5506 5507 5508@cindex @code{canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare} instruction pattern 5509@item @samp{canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare} 5510Canonicalize the function pointer in operand 1 and store the result 5511into operand 0. 5512 5513Operand 0 is always a @code{reg} and has mode @code{Pmode}; operand 1 5514may be a @code{reg}, @code{mem}, @code{symbol_ref}, @code{const_int}, etc 5515and also has mode @code{Pmode}. 5516 5517Canonicalization of a function pointer usually involves computing 5518the address of the function which would be called if the function 5519pointer were used in an indirect call. 5520 5521Only define this pattern if function pointers on the target machine 5522can have different values but still call the same function when 5523used in an indirect call. 5524 5525@cindex @code{save_stack_block} instruction pattern 5526@cindex @code{save_stack_function} instruction pattern 5527@cindex @code{save_stack_nonlocal} instruction pattern 5528@cindex @code{restore_stack_block} instruction pattern 5529@cindex @code{restore_stack_function} instruction pattern 5530@cindex @code{restore_stack_nonlocal} instruction pattern 5531@item @samp{save_stack_block} 5532@itemx @samp{save_stack_function} 5533@itemx @samp{save_stack_nonlocal} 5534@itemx @samp{restore_stack_block} 5535@itemx @samp{restore_stack_function} 5536@itemx @samp{restore_stack_nonlocal} 5537Most machines save and restore the stack pointer by copying it to or 5538from an object of mode @code{Pmode}. Do not define these patterns on 5539such machines. 5540 5541Some machines require special handling for stack pointer saves and 5542restores. On those machines, define the patterns corresponding to the 5543non-standard cases by using a @code{define_expand} (@pxref{Expander 5544Definitions}) that produces the required insns. The three types of 5545saves and restores are: 5546 5547@enumerate 5548@item 5549@samp{save_stack_block} saves the stack pointer at the start of a block 5550that allocates a variable-sized object, and @samp{restore_stack_block} 5551restores the stack pointer when the block is exited. 5552 5553@item 5554@samp{save_stack_function} and @samp{restore_stack_function} do a 5555similar job for the outermost block of a function and are used when the 5556function allocates variable-sized objects or calls @code{alloca}. Only 5557the epilogue uses the restored stack pointer, allowing a simpler save or 5558restore sequence on some machines. 5559 5560@item 5561@samp{save_stack_nonlocal} is used in functions that contain labels 5562branched to by nested functions. It saves the stack pointer in such a 5563way that the inner function can use @samp{restore_stack_nonlocal} to 5564restore the stack pointer. The compiler generates code to restore the 5565frame and argument pointer registers, but some machines require saving 5566and restoring additional data such as register window information or 5567stack backchains. Place insns in these patterns to save and restore any 5568such required data. 5569@end enumerate 5570 5571When saving the stack pointer, operand 0 is the save area and operand 1 5572is the stack pointer. The mode used to allocate the save area defaults 5573to @code{Pmode} but you can override that choice by defining the 5574@code{STACK_SAVEAREA_MODE} macro (@pxref{Storage Layout}). You must 5575specify an integral mode, or @code{VOIDmode} if no save area is needed 5576for a particular type of save (either because no save is needed or 5577because a machine-specific save area can be used). Operand 0 is the 5578stack pointer and operand 1 is the save area for restore operations. If 5579@samp{save_stack_block} is defined, operand 0 must not be 5580@code{VOIDmode} since these saves can be arbitrarily nested. 5581 5582A save area is a @code{mem} that is at a constant offset from 5583@code{virtual_stack_vars_rtx} when the stack pointer is saved for use by 5584nonlocal gotos and a @code{reg} in the other two cases. 5585 5586@cindex @code{allocate_stack} instruction pattern 5587@item @samp{allocate_stack} 5588Subtract (or add if @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is undefined) operand 1 from 5589the stack pointer to create space for dynamically allocated data. 5590 5591Store the resultant pointer to this space into operand 0. If you 5592are allocating space from the main stack, do this by emitting a 5593move insn to copy @code{virtual_stack_dynamic_rtx} to operand 0. 5594If you are allocating the space elsewhere, generate code to copy the 5595location of the space to operand 0. In the latter case, you must 5596ensure this space gets freed when the corresponding space on the main 5597stack is free. 5598 5599Do not define this pattern if all that must be done is the subtraction. 5600Some machines require other operations such as stack probes or 5601maintaining the back chain. Define this pattern to emit those 5602operations in addition to updating the stack pointer. 5603 5604@cindex @code{check_stack} instruction pattern 5605@item @samp{check_stack} 5606If stack checking (@pxref{Stack Checking}) cannot be done on your system by 5607probing the stack, define this pattern to perform the needed check and signal 5608an error if the stack has overflowed. The single operand is the address in 5609the stack farthest from the current stack pointer that you need to validate. 5610Normally, on platforms where this pattern is needed, you would obtain the 5611stack limit from a global or thread-specific variable or register. 5612 5613@cindex @code{probe_stack} instruction pattern 5614@item @samp{probe_stack} 5615If stack checking (@pxref{Stack Checking}) can be done on your system by 5616probing the stack but doing it with a ``store zero'' instruction is not valid 5617or optimal, define this pattern to do the probing differently and signal an 5618error if the stack has overflowed. The single operand is the memory reference 5619in the stack that needs to be probed. 5620 5621@cindex @code{nonlocal_goto} instruction pattern 5622@item @samp{nonlocal_goto} 5623Emit code to generate a non-local goto, e.g., a jump from one function 5624to a label in an outer function. This pattern has four arguments, 5625each representing a value to be used in the jump. The first 5626argument is to be loaded into the frame pointer, the second is 5627the address to branch to (code to dispatch to the actual label), 5628the third is the address of a location where the stack is saved, 5629and the last is the address of the label, to be placed in the 5630location for the incoming static chain. 5631 5632On most machines you need not define this pattern, since GCC will 5633already generate the correct code, which is to load the frame pointer 5634and static chain, restore the stack (using the 5635@samp{restore_stack_nonlocal} pattern, if defined), and jump indirectly 5636to the dispatcher. You need only define this pattern if this code will 5637not work on your machine. 5638 5639@cindex @code{nonlocal_goto_receiver} instruction pattern 5640@item @samp{nonlocal_goto_receiver} 5641This pattern, if defined, contains code needed at the target of a 5642nonlocal goto after the code already generated by GCC@. You will not 5643normally need to define this pattern. A typical reason why you might 5644need this pattern is if some value, such as a pointer to a global table, 5645must be restored when the frame pointer is restored. Note that a nonlocal 5646goto only occurs within a unit-of-translation, so a global table pointer 5647that is shared by all functions of a given module need not be restored. 5648There are no arguments. 5649 5650@cindex @code{exception_receiver} instruction pattern 5651@item @samp{exception_receiver} 5652This pattern, if defined, contains code needed at the site of an 5653exception handler that isn't needed at the site of a nonlocal goto. You 5654will not normally need to define this pattern. A typical reason why you 5655might need this pattern is if some value, such as a pointer to a global 5656table, must be restored after control flow is branched to the handler of 5657an exception. There are no arguments. 5658 5659@cindex @code{builtin_setjmp_setup} instruction pattern 5660@item @samp{builtin_setjmp_setup} 5661This pattern, if defined, contains additional code needed to initialize 5662the @code{jmp_buf}. You will not normally need to define this pattern. 5663A typical reason why you might need this pattern is if some value, such 5664as a pointer to a global table, must be restored. Though it is 5665preferred that the pointer value be recalculated if possible (given the 5666address of a label for instance). The single argument is a pointer to 5667the @code{jmp_buf}. Note that the buffer is five words long and that 5668the first three are normally used by the generic mechanism. 5669 5670@cindex @code{builtin_setjmp_receiver} instruction pattern 5671@item @samp{builtin_setjmp_receiver} 5672This pattern, if defined, contains code needed at the site of a 5673built-in setjmp that isn't needed at the site of a nonlocal goto. You 5674will not normally need to define this pattern. A typical reason why you 5675might need this pattern is if some value, such as a pointer to a global 5676table, must be restored. It takes one argument, which is the label 5677to which builtin_longjmp transfered control; this pattern may be emitted 5678at a small offset from that label. 5679 5680@cindex @code{builtin_longjmp} instruction pattern 5681@item @samp{builtin_longjmp} 5682This pattern, if defined, performs the entire action of the longjmp. 5683You will not normally need to define this pattern unless you also define 5684@code{builtin_setjmp_setup}. The single argument is a pointer to the 5685@code{jmp_buf}. 5686 5687@cindex @code{eh_return} instruction pattern 5688@item @samp{eh_return} 5689This pattern, if defined, affects the way @code{__builtin_eh_return}, 5690and thence the call frame exception handling library routines, are 5691built. It is intended to handle non-trivial actions needed along 5692the abnormal return path. 5693 5694The address of the exception handler to which the function should return 5695is passed as operand to this pattern. It will normally need to copied by 5696the pattern to some special register or memory location. 5697If the pattern needs to determine the location of the target call 5698frame in order to do so, it may use @code{EH_RETURN_STACKADJ_RTX}, 5699if defined; it will have already been assigned. 5700 5701If this pattern is not defined, the default action will be to simply 5702copy the return address to @code{EH_RETURN_HANDLER_RTX}. Either 5703that macro or this pattern needs to be defined if call frame exception 5704handling is to be used. 5705 5706@cindex @code{prologue} instruction pattern 5707@anchor{prologue instruction pattern} 5708@item @samp{prologue} 5709This pattern, if defined, emits RTL for entry to a function. The function 5710entry is responsible for setting up the stack frame, initializing the frame 5711pointer register, saving callee saved registers, etc. 5712 5713Using a prologue pattern is generally preferred over defining 5714@code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} to emit assembly code for the prologue. 5715 5716The @code{prologue} pattern is particularly useful for targets which perform 5717instruction scheduling. 5718 5719@cindex @code{window_save} instruction pattern 5720@anchor{window_save instruction pattern} 5721@item @samp{window_save} 5722This pattern, if defined, emits RTL for a register window save. It should 5723be defined if the target machine has register windows but the window events 5724are decoupled from calls to subroutines. The canonical example is the SPARC 5725architecture. 5726 5727@cindex @code{epilogue} instruction pattern 5728@anchor{epilogue instruction pattern} 5729@item @samp{epilogue} 5730This pattern emits RTL for exit from a function. The function 5731exit is responsible for deallocating the stack frame, restoring callee saved 5732registers and emitting the return instruction. 5733 5734Using an epilogue pattern is generally preferred over defining 5735@code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} to emit assembly code for the epilogue. 5736 5737The @code{epilogue} pattern is particularly useful for targets which perform 5738instruction scheduling or which have delay slots for their return instruction. 5739 5740@cindex @code{sibcall_epilogue} instruction pattern 5741@item @samp{sibcall_epilogue} 5742This pattern, if defined, emits RTL for exit from a function without the final 5743branch back to the calling function. This pattern will be emitted before any 5744sibling call (aka tail call) sites. 5745 5746The @code{sibcall_epilogue} pattern must not clobber any arguments used for 5747parameter passing or any stack slots for arguments passed to the current 5748function. 5749 5750@cindex @code{trap} instruction pattern 5751@item @samp{trap} 5752This pattern, if defined, signals an error, typically by causing some 5753kind of signal to be raised. Among other places, it is used by the Java 5754front end to signal `invalid array index' exceptions. 5755 5756@cindex @code{ctrap@var{MM}4} instruction pattern 5757@item @samp{ctrap@var{MM}4} 5758Conditional trap instruction. Operand 0 is a piece of RTL which 5759performs a comparison, and operands 1 and 2 are the arms of the 5760comparison. Operand 3 is the trap code, an integer. 5761 5762A typical @code{ctrap} pattern looks like 5763 5764@smallexample 5765(define_insn "ctrapsi4" 5766 [(trap_if (match_operator 0 "trap_operator" 5767 [(match_operand 1 "register_operand") 5768 (match_operand 2 "immediate_operand")]) 5769 (match_operand 3 "const_int_operand" "i"))] 5770 "" 5771 "@dots{}") 5772@end smallexample 5773 5774@cindex @code{prefetch} instruction pattern 5775@item @samp{prefetch} 5776 5777This pattern, if defined, emits code for a non-faulting data prefetch 5778instruction. Operand 0 is the address of the memory to prefetch. Operand 1 5779is a constant 1 if the prefetch is preparing for a write to the memory 5780address, or a constant 0 otherwise. Operand 2 is the expected degree of 5781temporal locality of the data and is a value between 0 and 3, inclusive; 0 5782means that the data has no temporal locality, so it need not be left in the 5783cache after the access; 3 means that the data has a high degree of temporal 5784locality and should be left in all levels of cache possible; 1 and 2 mean, 5785respectively, a low or moderate degree of temporal locality. 5786 5787Targets that do not support write prefetches or locality hints can ignore 5788the values of operands 1 and 2. 5789 5790@cindex @code{blockage} instruction pattern 5791@item @samp{blockage} 5792 5793This pattern defines a pseudo insn that prevents the instruction 5794scheduler from moving instructions across the boundary defined by the 5795blockage insn. Normally an UNSPEC_VOLATILE pattern. 5796 5797@cindex @code{memory_barrier} instruction pattern 5798@item @samp{memory_barrier} 5799 5800If the target memory model is not fully synchronous, then this pattern 5801should be defined to an instruction that orders both loads and stores 5802before the instruction with respect to loads and stores after the instruction. 5803This pattern has no operands. 5804 5805@cindex @code{sync_compare_and_swap@var{mode}} instruction pattern 5806@item @samp{sync_compare_and_swap@var{mode}} 5807 5808This pattern, if defined, emits code for an atomic compare-and-swap 5809operation. Operand 1 is the memory on which the atomic operation is 5810performed. Operand 2 is the ``old'' value to be compared against the 5811current contents of the memory location. Operand 3 is the ``new'' value 5812to store in the memory if the compare succeeds. Operand 0 is the result 5813of the operation; it should contain the contents of the memory 5814before the operation. If the compare succeeds, this should obviously be 5815a copy of operand 2. 5816 5817This pattern must show that both operand 0 and operand 1 are modified. 5818 5819This pattern must issue any memory barrier instructions such that all 5820memory operations before the atomic operation occur before the atomic 5821operation and all memory operations after the atomic operation occur 5822after the atomic operation. 5823 5824For targets where the success or failure of the compare-and-swap 5825operation is available via the status flags, it is possible to 5826avoid a separate compare operation and issue the subsequent 5827branch or store-flag operation immediately after the compare-and-swap. 5828To this end, GCC will look for a @code{MODE_CC} set in the 5829output of @code{sync_compare_and_swap@var{mode}}; if the machine 5830description includes such a set, the target should also define special 5831@code{cbranchcc4} and/or @code{cstorecc4} instructions. GCC will then 5832be able to take the destination of the @code{MODE_CC} set and pass it 5833to the @code{cbranchcc4} or @code{cstorecc4} pattern as the first 5834operand of the comparison (the second will be @code{(const_int 0)}). 5835 5836For targets where the operating system may provide support for this 5837operation via library calls, the @code{sync_compare_and_swap_optab} 5838may be initialized to a function with the same interface as the 5839@code{__sync_val_compare_and_swap_@var{n}} built-in. If the entire 5840set of @var{__sync} builtins are supported via library calls, the 5841target can initialize all of the optabs at once with 5842@code{init_sync_libfuncs}. 5843For the purposes of C++11 @code{std::atomic::is_lock_free}, it is 5844assumed that these library calls do @emph{not} use any kind of 5845interruptable locking. 5846 5847@cindex @code{sync_add@var{mode}} instruction pattern 5848@cindex @code{sync_sub@var{mode}} instruction pattern 5849@cindex @code{sync_ior@var{mode}} instruction pattern 5850@cindex @code{sync_and@var{mode}} instruction pattern 5851@cindex @code{sync_xor@var{mode}} instruction pattern 5852@cindex @code{sync_nand@var{mode}} instruction pattern 5853@item @samp{sync_add@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_sub@var{mode}} 5854@itemx @samp{sync_ior@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_and@var{mode}} 5855@itemx @samp{sync_xor@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_nand@var{mode}} 5856 5857These patterns emit code for an atomic operation on memory. 5858Operand 0 is the memory on which the atomic operation is performed. 5859Operand 1 is the second operand to the binary operator. 5860 5861This pattern must issue any memory barrier instructions such that all 5862memory operations before the atomic operation occur before the atomic 5863operation and all memory operations after the atomic operation occur 5864after the atomic operation. 5865 5866If these patterns are not defined, the operation will be constructed 5867from a compare-and-swap operation, if defined. 5868 5869@cindex @code{sync_old_add@var{mode}} instruction pattern 5870@cindex @code{sync_old_sub@var{mode}} instruction pattern 5871@cindex @code{sync_old_ior@var{mode}} instruction pattern 5872@cindex @code{sync_old_and@var{mode}} instruction pattern 5873@cindex @code{sync_old_xor@var{mode}} instruction pattern 5874@cindex @code{sync_old_nand@var{mode}} instruction pattern 5875@item @samp{sync_old_add@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_old_sub@var{mode}} 5876@itemx @samp{sync_old_ior@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_old_and@var{mode}} 5877@itemx @samp{sync_old_xor@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_old_nand@var{mode}} 5878 5879These patterns are emit code for an atomic operation on memory, 5880and return the value that the memory contained before the operation. 5881Operand 0 is the result value, operand 1 is the memory on which the 5882atomic operation is performed, and operand 2 is the second operand 5883to the binary operator. 5884 5885This pattern must issue any memory barrier instructions such that all 5886memory operations before the atomic operation occur before the atomic 5887operation and all memory operations after the atomic operation occur 5888after the atomic operation. 5889 5890If these patterns are not defined, the operation will be constructed 5891from a compare-and-swap operation, if defined. 5892 5893@cindex @code{sync_new_add@var{mode}} instruction pattern 5894@cindex @code{sync_new_sub@var{mode}} instruction pattern 5895@cindex @code{sync_new_ior@var{mode}} instruction pattern 5896@cindex @code{sync_new_and@var{mode}} instruction pattern 5897@cindex @code{sync_new_xor@var{mode}} instruction pattern 5898@cindex @code{sync_new_nand@var{mode}} instruction pattern 5899@item @samp{sync_new_add@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_new_sub@var{mode}} 5900@itemx @samp{sync_new_ior@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_new_and@var{mode}} 5901@itemx @samp{sync_new_xor@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_new_nand@var{mode}} 5902 5903These patterns are like their @code{sync_old_@var{op}} counterparts, 5904except that they return the value that exists in the memory location 5905after the operation, rather than before the operation. 5906 5907@cindex @code{sync_lock_test_and_set@var{mode}} instruction pattern 5908@item @samp{sync_lock_test_and_set@var{mode}} 5909 5910This pattern takes two forms, based on the capabilities of the target. 5911In either case, operand 0 is the result of the operand, operand 1 is 5912the memory on which the atomic operation is performed, and operand 2 5913is the value to set in the lock. 5914 5915In the ideal case, this operation is an atomic exchange operation, in 5916which the previous value in memory operand is copied into the result 5917operand, and the value operand is stored in the memory operand. 5918 5919For less capable targets, any value operand that is not the constant 1 5920should be rejected with @code{FAIL}. In this case the target may use 5921an atomic test-and-set bit operation. The result operand should contain 59221 if the bit was previously set and 0 if the bit was previously clear. 5923The true contents of the memory operand are implementation defined. 5924 5925This pattern must issue any memory barrier instructions such that the 5926pattern as a whole acts as an acquire barrier, that is all memory 5927operations after the pattern do not occur until the lock is acquired. 5928 5929If this pattern is not defined, the operation will be constructed from 5930a compare-and-swap operation, if defined. 5931 5932@cindex @code{sync_lock_release@var{mode}} instruction pattern 5933@item @samp{sync_lock_release@var{mode}} 5934 5935This pattern, if defined, releases a lock set by 5936@code{sync_lock_test_and_set@var{mode}}. Operand 0 is the memory 5937that contains the lock; operand 1 is the value to store in the lock. 5938 5939If the target doesn't implement full semantics for 5940@code{sync_lock_test_and_set@var{mode}}, any value operand which is not 5941the constant 0 should be rejected with @code{FAIL}, and the true contents 5942of the memory operand are implementation defined. 5943 5944This pattern must issue any memory barrier instructions such that the 5945pattern as a whole acts as a release barrier, that is the lock is 5946released only after all previous memory operations have completed. 5947 5948If this pattern is not defined, then a @code{memory_barrier} pattern 5949will be emitted, followed by a store of the value to the memory operand. 5950 5951@cindex @code{atomic_compare_and_swap@var{mode}} instruction pattern 5952@item @samp{atomic_compare_and_swap@var{mode}} 5953This pattern, if defined, emits code for an atomic compare-and-swap 5954operation with memory model semantics. Operand 2 is the memory on which 5955the atomic operation is performed. Operand 0 is an output operand which 5956is set to true or false based on whether the operation succeeded. Operand 59571 is an output operand which is set to the contents of the memory before 5958the operation was attempted. Operand 3 is the value that is expected to 5959be in memory. Operand 4 is the value to put in memory if the expected 5960value is found there. Operand 5 is set to 1 if this compare and swap is to 5961be treated as a weak operation. Operand 6 is the memory model to be used 5962if the operation is a success. Operand 7 is the memory model to be used 5963if the operation fails. 5964 5965If memory referred to in operand 2 contains the value in operand 3, then 5966operand 4 is stored in memory pointed to by operand 2 and fencing based on 5967the memory model in operand 6 is issued. 5968 5969If memory referred to in operand 2 does not contain the value in operand 3, 5970then fencing based on the memory model in operand 7 is issued. 5971 5972If a target does not support weak compare-and-swap operations, or the port 5973elects not to implement weak operations, the argument in operand 5 can be 5974ignored. Note a strong implementation must be provided. 5975 5976If this pattern is not provided, the @code{__atomic_compare_exchange} 5977built-in functions will utilize the legacy @code{sync_compare_and_swap} 5978pattern with an @code{__ATOMIC_SEQ_CST} memory model. 5979 5980@cindex @code{atomic_load@var{mode}} instruction pattern 5981@item @samp{atomic_load@var{mode}} 5982This pattern implements an atomic load operation with memory model 5983semantics. Operand 1 is the memory address being loaded from. Operand 0 5984is the result of the load. Operand 2 is the memory model to be used for 5985the load operation. 5986 5987If not present, the @code{__atomic_load} built-in function will either 5988resort to a normal load with memory barriers, or a compare-and-swap 5989operation if a normal load would not be atomic. 5990 5991@cindex @code{atomic_store@var{mode}} instruction pattern 5992@item @samp{atomic_store@var{mode}} 5993This pattern implements an atomic store operation with memory model 5994semantics. Operand 0 is the memory address being stored to. Operand 1 5995is the value to be written. Operand 2 is the memory model to be used for 5996the operation. 5997 5998If not present, the @code{__atomic_store} built-in function will attempt to 5999perform a normal store and surround it with any required memory fences. If 6000the store would not be atomic, then an @code{__atomic_exchange} is 6001attempted with the result being ignored. 6002 6003@cindex @code{atomic_exchange@var{mode}} instruction pattern 6004@item @samp{atomic_exchange@var{mode}} 6005This pattern implements an atomic exchange operation with memory model 6006semantics. Operand 1 is the memory location the operation is performed on. 6007Operand 0 is an output operand which is set to the original value contained 6008in the memory pointed to by operand 1. Operand 2 is the value to be 6009stored. Operand 3 is the memory model to be used. 6010 6011If this pattern is not present, the built-in function 6012@code{__atomic_exchange} will attempt to preform the operation with a 6013compare and swap loop. 6014 6015@cindex @code{atomic_add@var{mode}} instruction pattern 6016@cindex @code{atomic_sub@var{mode}} instruction pattern 6017@cindex @code{atomic_or@var{mode}} instruction pattern 6018@cindex @code{atomic_and@var{mode}} instruction pattern 6019@cindex @code{atomic_xor@var{mode}} instruction pattern 6020@cindex @code{atomic_nand@var{mode}} instruction pattern 6021@item @samp{atomic_add@var{mode}}, @samp{atomic_sub@var{mode}} 6022@itemx @samp{atomic_or@var{mode}}, @samp{atomic_and@var{mode}} 6023@itemx @samp{atomic_xor@var{mode}}, @samp{atomic_nand@var{mode}} 6024 6025These patterns emit code for an atomic operation on memory with memory 6026model semantics. Operand 0 is the memory on which the atomic operation is 6027performed. Operand 1 is the second operand to the binary operator. 6028Operand 2 is the memory model to be used by the operation. 6029 6030If these patterns are not defined, attempts will be made to use legacy 6031@code{sync} patterns, or equivilent patterns which return a result. If 6032none of these are available a compare-and-swap loop will be used. 6033 6034@cindex @code{atomic_fetch_add@var{mode}} instruction pattern 6035@cindex @code{atomic_fetch_sub@var{mode}} instruction pattern 6036@cindex @code{atomic_fetch_or@var{mode}} instruction pattern 6037@cindex @code{atomic_fetch_and@var{mode}} instruction pattern 6038@cindex @code{atomic_fetch_xor@var{mode}} instruction pattern 6039@cindex @code{atomic_fetch_nand@var{mode}} instruction pattern 6040@item @samp{atomic_fetch_add@var{mode}}, @samp{atomic_fetch_sub@var{mode}} 6041@itemx @samp{atomic_fetch_or@var{mode}}, @samp{atomic_fetch_and@var{mode}} 6042@itemx @samp{atomic_fetch_xor@var{mode}}, @samp{atomic_fetch_nand@var{mode}} 6043 6044These patterns emit code for an atomic operation on memory with memory 6045model semantics, and return the original value. Operand 0 is an output 6046operand which contains the value of the memory location before the 6047operation was performed. Operand 1 is the memory on which the atomic 6048operation is performed. Operand 2 is the second operand to the binary 6049operator. Operand 3 is the memory model to be used by the operation. 6050 6051If these patterns are not defined, attempts will be made to use legacy 6052@code{sync} patterns. If none of these are available a compare-and-swap 6053loop will be used. 6054 6055@cindex @code{atomic_add_fetch@var{mode}} instruction pattern 6056@cindex @code{atomic_sub_fetch@var{mode}} instruction pattern 6057@cindex @code{atomic_or_fetch@var{mode}} instruction pattern 6058@cindex @code{atomic_and_fetch@var{mode}} instruction pattern 6059@cindex @code{atomic_xor_fetch@var{mode}} instruction pattern 6060@cindex @code{atomic_nand_fetch@var{mode}} instruction pattern 6061@item @samp{atomic_add_fetch@var{mode}}, @samp{atomic_sub_fetch@var{mode}} 6062@itemx @samp{atomic_or_fetch@var{mode}}, @samp{atomic_and_fetch@var{mode}} 6063@itemx @samp{atomic_xor_fetch@var{mode}}, @samp{atomic_nand_fetch@var{mode}} 6064 6065These patterns emit code for an atomic operation on memory with memory 6066model semantics and return the result after the operation is performed. 6067Operand 0 is an output operand which contains the value after the 6068operation. Operand 1 is the memory on which the atomic operation is 6069performed. Operand 2 is the second operand to the binary operator. 6070Operand 3 is the memory model to be used by the operation. 6071 6072If these patterns are not defined, attempts will be made to use legacy 6073@code{sync} patterns, or equivilent patterns which return the result before 6074the operation followed by the arithmetic operation required to produce the 6075result. If none of these are available a compare-and-swap loop will be 6076used. 6077 6078@cindex @code{atomic_test_and_set} instruction pattern 6079@item @samp{atomic_test_and_set} 6080 6081This pattern emits code for @code{__builtin_atomic_test_and_set}. 6082Operand 0 is an output operand which is set to true if the previous 6083previous contents of the byte was "set", and false otherwise. Operand 1 6084is the @code{QImode} memory to be modified. Operand 2 is the memory 6085model to be used. 6086 6087The specific value that defines "set" is implementation defined, and 6088is normally based on what is performed by the native atomic test and set 6089instruction. 6090 6091@cindex @code{mem_thread_fence@var{mode}} instruction pattern 6092@item @samp{mem_thread_fence@var{mode}} 6093This pattern emits code required to implement a thread fence with 6094memory model semantics. Operand 0 is the memory model to be used. 6095 6096If this pattern is not specified, all memory models except 6097@code{__ATOMIC_RELAXED} will result in issuing a @code{sync_synchronize} 6098barrier pattern. 6099 6100@cindex @code{mem_signal_fence@var{mode}} instruction pattern 6101@item @samp{mem_signal_fence@var{mode}} 6102This pattern emits code required to implement a signal fence with 6103memory model semantics. Operand 0 is the memory model to be used. 6104 6105This pattern should impact the compiler optimizers the same way that 6106mem_signal_fence does, but it does not need to issue any barrier 6107instructions. 6108 6109If this pattern is not specified, all memory models except 6110@code{__ATOMIC_RELAXED} will result in issuing a @code{sync_synchronize} 6111barrier pattern. 6112 6113@cindex @code{stack_protect_set} instruction pattern 6114@item @samp{stack_protect_set} 6115 6116This pattern, if defined, moves a @code{ptr_mode} value from the memory 6117in operand 1 to the memory in operand 0 without leaving the value in 6118a register afterward. This is to avoid leaking the value some place 6119that an attacker might use to rewrite the stack guard slot after 6120having clobbered it. 6121 6122If this pattern is not defined, then a plain move pattern is generated. 6123 6124@cindex @code{stack_protect_test} instruction pattern 6125@item @samp{stack_protect_test} 6126 6127This pattern, if defined, compares a @code{ptr_mode} value from the 6128memory in operand 1 with the memory in operand 0 without leaving the 6129value in a register afterward and branches to operand 2 if the values 6130weren't equal. 6131 6132If this pattern is not defined, then a plain compare pattern and 6133conditional branch pattern is used. 6134 6135@cindex @code{clear_cache} instruction pattern 6136@item @samp{clear_cache} 6137 6138This pattern, if defined, flushes the instruction cache for a region of 6139memory. The region is bounded to by the Pmode pointers in operand 0 6140inclusive and operand 1 exclusive. 6141 6142If this pattern is not defined, a call to the library function 6143@code{__clear_cache} is used. 6144 6145@end table 6146 6147@end ifset 6148@c Each of the following nodes are wrapped in separate 6149@c "@ifset INTERNALS" to work around memory limits for the default 6150@c configuration in older tetex distributions. Known to not work: 6151@c tetex-1.0.7, known to work: tetex-2.0.2. 6152@ifset INTERNALS 6153@node Pattern Ordering 6154@section When the Order of Patterns Matters 6155@cindex Pattern Ordering 6156@cindex Ordering of Patterns 6157 6158Sometimes an insn can match more than one instruction pattern. Then the 6159pattern that appears first in the machine description is the one used. 6160Therefore, more specific patterns (patterns that will match fewer things) 6161and faster instructions (those that will produce better code when they 6162do match) should usually go first in the description. 6163 6164In some cases the effect of ordering the patterns can be used to hide 6165a pattern when it is not valid. For example, the 68000 has an 6166instruction for converting a fullword to floating point and another 6167for converting a byte to floating point. An instruction converting 6168an integer to floating point could match either one. We put the 6169pattern to convert the fullword first to make sure that one will 6170be used rather than the other. (Otherwise a large integer might 6171be generated as a single-byte immediate quantity, which would not work.) 6172Instead of using this pattern ordering it would be possible to make the 6173pattern for convert-a-byte smart enough to deal properly with any 6174constant value. 6175 6176@end ifset 6177@ifset INTERNALS 6178@node Dependent Patterns 6179@section Interdependence of Patterns 6180@cindex Dependent Patterns 6181@cindex Interdependence of Patterns 6182 6183In some cases machines support instructions identical except for the 6184machine mode of one or more operands. For example, there may be 6185``sign-extend halfword'' and ``sign-extend byte'' instructions whose 6186patterns are 6187 6188@smallexample 6189(set (match_operand:SI 0 @dots{}) 6190 (extend:SI (match_operand:HI 1 @dots{}))) 6191 6192(set (match_operand:SI 0 @dots{}) 6193 (extend:SI (match_operand:QI 1 @dots{}))) 6194@end smallexample 6195 6196@noindent 6197Constant integers do not specify a machine mode, so an instruction to 6198extend a constant value could match either pattern. The pattern it 6199actually will match is the one that appears first in the file. For correct 6200results, this must be the one for the widest possible mode (@code{HImode}, 6201here). If the pattern matches the @code{QImode} instruction, the results 6202will be incorrect if the constant value does not actually fit that mode. 6203 6204Such instructions to extend constants are rarely generated because they are 6205optimized away, but they do occasionally happen in nonoptimized 6206compilations. 6207 6208If a constraint in a pattern allows a constant, the reload pass may 6209replace a register with a constant permitted by the constraint in some 6210cases. Similarly for memory references. Because of this substitution, 6211you should not provide separate patterns for increment and decrement 6212instructions. Instead, they should be generated from the same pattern 6213that supports register-register add insns by examining the operands and 6214generating the appropriate machine instruction. 6215 6216@end ifset 6217@ifset INTERNALS 6218@node Jump Patterns 6219@section Defining Jump Instruction Patterns 6220@cindex jump instruction patterns 6221@cindex defining jump instruction patterns 6222 6223GCC does not assume anything about how the machine realizes jumps. 6224The machine description should define a single pattern, usually 6225a @code{define_expand}, which expands to all the required insns. 6226 6227Usually, this would be a comparison insn to set the condition code 6228and a separate branch insn testing the condition code and branching 6229or not according to its value. For many machines, however, 6230separating compares and branches is limiting, which is why the 6231more flexible approach with one @code{define_expand} is used in GCC. 6232The machine description becomes clearer for architectures that 6233have compare-and-branch instructions but no condition code. It also 6234works better when different sets of comparison operators are supported 6235by different kinds of conditional branches (e.g. integer vs. floating-point), 6236or by conditional branches with respect to conditional stores. 6237 6238Two separate insns are always used if the machine description represents 6239a condition code register using the legacy RTL expression @code{(cc0)}, 6240and on most machines that use a separate condition code register 6241(@pxref{Condition Code}). For machines that use @code{(cc0)}, in 6242fact, the set and use of the condition code must be separate and 6243adjacent@footnote{@code{note} insns can separate them, though.}, thus 6244allowing flags in @code{cc_status} to be used (@pxref{Condition Code}) and 6245so that the comparison and branch insns could be located from each other 6246by using the functions @code{prev_cc0_setter} and @code{next_cc0_user}. 6247 6248Even in this case having a single entry point for conditional branches 6249is advantageous, because it handles equally well the case where a single 6250comparison instruction records the results of both signed and unsigned 6251comparison of the given operands (with the branch insns coming in distinct 6252signed and unsigned flavors) as in the x86 or SPARC, and the case where 6253there are distinct signed and unsigned compare instructions and only 6254one set of conditional branch instructions as in the PowerPC. 6255 6256@end ifset 6257@ifset INTERNALS 6258@node Looping Patterns 6259@section Defining Looping Instruction Patterns 6260@cindex looping instruction patterns 6261@cindex defining looping instruction patterns 6262 6263Some machines have special jump instructions that can be utilized to 6264make loops more efficient. A common example is the 68000 @samp{dbra} 6265instruction which performs a decrement of a register and a branch if the 6266result was greater than zero. Other machines, in particular digital 6267signal processors (DSPs), have special block repeat instructions to 6268provide low-overhead loop support. For example, the TI TMS320C3x/C4x 6269DSPs have a block repeat instruction that loads special registers to 6270mark the top and end of a loop and to count the number of loop 6271iterations. This avoids the need for fetching and executing a 6272@samp{dbra}-like instruction and avoids pipeline stalls associated with 6273the jump. 6274 6275GCC has three special named patterns to support low overhead looping. 6276They are @samp{decrement_and_branch_until_zero}, @samp{doloop_begin}, 6277and @samp{doloop_end}. The first pattern, 6278@samp{decrement_and_branch_until_zero}, is not emitted during RTL 6279generation but may be emitted during the instruction combination phase. 6280This requires the assistance of the loop optimizer, using information 6281collected during strength reduction, to reverse a loop to count down to 6282zero. Some targets also require the loop optimizer to add a 6283@code{REG_NONNEG} note to indicate that the iteration count is always 6284positive. This is needed if the target performs a signed loop 6285termination test. For example, the 68000 uses a pattern similar to the 6286following for its @code{dbra} instruction: 6287 6288@smallexample 6289@group 6290(define_insn "decrement_and_branch_until_zero" 6291 [(set (pc) 6292 (if_then_else 6293 (ge (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "+d*am") 6294 (const_int -1)) 6295 (const_int 0)) 6296 (label_ref (match_operand 1 "" "")) 6297 (pc))) 6298 (set (match_dup 0) 6299 (plus:SI (match_dup 0) 6300 (const_int -1)))] 6301 "find_reg_note (insn, REG_NONNEG, 0)" 6302 "@dots{}") 6303@end group 6304@end smallexample 6305 6306Note that since the insn is both a jump insn and has an output, it must 6307deal with its own reloads, hence the `m' constraints. Also note that 6308since this insn is generated by the instruction combination phase 6309combining two sequential insns together into an implicit parallel insn, 6310the iteration counter needs to be biased by the same amount as the 6311decrement operation, in this case @minus{}1. Note that the following similar 6312pattern will not be matched by the combiner. 6313 6314@smallexample 6315@group 6316(define_insn "decrement_and_branch_until_zero" 6317 [(set (pc) 6318 (if_then_else 6319 (ge (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "+d*am") 6320 (const_int 1)) 6321 (label_ref (match_operand 1 "" "")) 6322 (pc))) 6323 (set (match_dup 0) 6324 (plus:SI (match_dup 0) 6325 (const_int -1)))] 6326 "find_reg_note (insn, REG_NONNEG, 0)" 6327 "@dots{}") 6328@end group 6329@end smallexample 6330 6331The other two special looping patterns, @samp{doloop_begin} and 6332@samp{doloop_end}, are emitted by the loop optimizer for certain 6333well-behaved loops with a finite number of loop iterations using 6334information collected during strength reduction. 6335 6336The @samp{doloop_end} pattern describes the actual looping instruction 6337(or the implicit looping operation) and the @samp{doloop_begin} pattern 6338is an optional companion pattern that can be used for initialization 6339needed for some low-overhead looping instructions. 6340 6341Note that some machines require the actual looping instruction to be 6342emitted at the top of the loop (e.g., the TMS320C3x/C4x DSPs). Emitting 6343the true RTL for a looping instruction at the top of the loop can cause 6344problems with flow analysis. So instead, a dummy @code{doloop} insn is 6345emitted at the end of the loop. The machine dependent reorg pass checks 6346for the presence of this @code{doloop} insn and then searches back to 6347the top of the loop, where it inserts the true looping insn (provided 6348there are no instructions in the loop which would cause problems). Any 6349additional labels can be emitted at this point. In addition, if the 6350desired special iteration counter register was not allocated, this 6351machine dependent reorg pass could emit a traditional compare and jump 6352instruction pair. 6353 6354The essential difference between the 6355@samp{decrement_and_branch_until_zero} and the @samp{doloop_end} 6356patterns is that the loop optimizer allocates an additional pseudo 6357register for the latter as an iteration counter. This pseudo register 6358cannot be used within the loop (i.e., general induction variables cannot 6359be derived from it), however, in many cases the loop induction variable 6360may become redundant and removed by the flow pass. 6361 6362 6363@end ifset 6364@ifset INTERNALS 6365@node Insn Canonicalizations 6366@section Canonicalization of Instructions 6367@cindex canonicalization of instructions 6368@cindex insn canonicalization 6369 6370There are often cases where multiple RTL expressions could represent an 6371operation performed by a single machine instruction. This situation is 6372most commonly encountered with logical, branch, and multiply-accumulate 6373instructions. In such cases, the compiler attempts to convert these 6374multiple RTL expressions into a single canonical form to reduce the 6375number of insn patterns required. 6376 6377In addition to algebraic simplifications, following canonicalizations 6378are performed: 6379 6380@itemize @bullet 6381@item 6382For commutative and comparison operators, a constant is always made the 6383second operand. If a machine only supports a constant as the second 6384operand, only patterns that match a constant in the second operand need 6385be supplied. 6386 6387@item 6388For associative operators, a sequence of operators will always chain 6389to the left; for instance, only the left operand of an integer @code{plus} 6390can itself be a @code{plus}. @code{and}, @code{ior}, @code{xor}, 6391@code{plus}, @code{mult}, @code{smin}, @code{smax}, @code{umin}, and 6392@code{umax} are associative when applied to integers, and sometimes to 6393floating-point. 6394 6395@item 6396@cindex @code{neg}, canonicalization of 6397@cindex @code{not}, canonicalization of 6398@cindex @code{mult}, canonicalization of 6399@cindex @code{plus}, canonicalization of 6400@cindex @code{minus}, canonicalization of 6401For these operators, if only one operand is a @code{neg}, @code{not}, 6402@code{mult}, @code{plus}, or @code{minus} expression, it will be the 6403first operand. 6404 6405@item 6406In combinations of @code{neg}, @code{mult}, @code{plus}, and 6407@code{minus}, the @code{neg} operations (if any) will be moved inside 6408the operations as far as possible. For instance, 6409@code{(neg (mult A B))} is canonicalized as @code{(mult (neg A) B)}, but 6410@code{(plus (mult (neg B) C) A)} is canonicalized as 6411@code{(minus A (mult B C))}. 6412 6413@cindex @code{compare}, canonicalization of 6414@item 6415For the @code{compare} operator, a constant is always the second operand 6416if the first argument is a condition code register or @code{(cc0)}. 6417 6418@item 6419An operand of @code{neg}, @code{not}, @code{mult}, @code{plus}, or 6420@code{minus} is made the first operand under the same conditions as 6421above. 6422 6423@item 6424@code{(ltu (plus @var{a} @var{b}) @var{b})} is converted to 6425@code{(ltu (plus @var{a} @var{b}) @var{a})}. Likewise with @code{geu} instead 6426of @code{ltu}. 6427 6428@item 6429@code{(minus @var{x} (const_int @var{n}))} is converted to 6430@code{(plus @var{x} (const_int @var{-n}))}. 6431 6432@item 6433Within address computations (i.e., inside @code{mem}), a left shift is 6434converted into the appropriate multiplication by a power of two. 6435 6436@cindex @code{ior}, canonicalization of 6437@cindex @code{and}, canonicalization of 6438@cindex De Morgan's law 6439@item 6440De Morgan's Law is used to move bitwise negation inside a bitwise 6441logical-and or logical-or operation. If this results in only one 6442operand being a @code{not} expression, it will be the first one. 6443 6444A machine that has an instruction that performs a bitwise logical-and of one 6445operand with the bitwise negation of the other should specify the pattern 6446for that instruction as 6447 6448@smallexample 6449(define_insn "" 6450 [(set (match_operand:@var{m} 0 @dots{}) 6451 (and:@var{m} (not:@var{m} (match_operand:@var{m} 1 @dots{})) 6452 (match_operand:@var{m} 2 @dots{})))] 6453 "@dots{}" 6454 "@dots{}") 6455@end smallexample 6456 6457@noindent 6458Similarly, a pattern for a ``NAND'' instruction should be written 6459 6460@smallexample 6461(define_insn "" 6462 [(set (match_operand:@var{m} 0 @dots{}) 6463 (ior:@var{m} (not:@var{m} (match_operand:@var{m} 1 @dots{})) 6464 (not:@var{m} (match_operand:@var{m} 2 @dots{}))))] 6465 "@dots{}" 6466 "@dots{}") 6467@end smallexample 6468 6469In both cases, it is not necessary to include patterns for the many 6470logically equivalent RTL expressions. 6471 6472@cindex @code{xor}, canonicalization of 6473@item 6474The only possible RTL expressions involving both bitwise exclusive-or 6475and bitwise negation are @code{(xor:@var{m} @var{x} @var{y})} 6476and @code{(not:@var{m} (xor:@var{m} @var{x} @var{y}))}. 6477 6478@item 6479The sum of three items, one of which is a constant, will only appear in 6480the form 6481 6482@smallexample 6483(plus:@var{m} (plus:@var{m} @var{x} @var{y}) @var{constant}) 6484@end smallexample 6485 6486@cindex @code{zero_extract}, canonicalization of 6487@cindex @code{sign_extract}, canonicalization of 6488@item 6489Equality comparisons of a group of bits (usually a single bit) with zero 6490will be written using @code{zero_extract} rather than the equivalent 6491@code{and} or @code{sign_extract} operations. 6492 6493@cindex @code{mult}, canonicalization of 6494@item 6495@code{(sign_extend:@var{m1} (mult:@var{m2} (sign_extend:@var{m2} @var{x}) 6496(sign_extend:@var{m2} @var{y})))} is converted to @code{(mult:@var{m1} 6497(sign_extend:@var{m1} @var{x}) (sign_extend:@var{m1} @var{y}))}, and likewise 6498for @code{zero_extend}. 6499 6500@item 6501@code{(sign_extend:@var{m1} (mult:@var{m2} (ashiftrt:@var{m2} 6502@var{x} @var{s}) (sign_extend:@var{m2} @var{y})))} is converted 6503to @code{(mult:@var{m1} (sign_extend:@var{m1} (ashiftrt:@var{m2} 6504@var{x} @var{s})) (sign_extend:@var{m1} @var{y}))}, and likewise for 6505patterns using @code{zero_extend} and @code{lshiftrt}. If the second 6506operand of @code{mult} is also a shift, then that is extended also. 6507This transformation is only applied when it can be proven that the 6508original operation had sufficient precision to prevent overflow. 6509 6510@end itemize 6511 6512Further canonicalization rules are defined in the function 6513@code{commutative_operand_precedence} in @file{gcc/rtlanal.c}. 6514 6515@end ifset 6516@ifset INTERNALS 6517@node Expander Definitions 6518@section Defining RTL Sequences for Code Generation 6519@cindex expander definitions 6520@cindex code generation RTL sequences 6521@cindex defining RTL sequences for code generation 6522 6523On some target machines, some standard pattern names for RTL generation 6524cannot be handled with single insn, but a sequence of RTL insns can 6525represent them. For these target machines, you can write a 6526@code{define_expand} to specify how to generate the sequence of RTL@. 6527 6528@findex define_expand 6529A @code{define_expand} is an RTL expression that looks almost like a 6530@code{define_insn}; but, unlike the latter, a @code{define_expand} is used 6531only for RTL generation and it can produce more than one RTL insn. 6532 6533A @code{define_expand} RTX has four operands: 6534 6535@itemize @bullet 6536@item 6537The name. Each @code{define_expand} must have a name, since the only 6538use for it is to refer to it by name. 6539 6540@item 6541The RTL template. This is a vector of RTL expressions representing 6542a sequence of separate instructions. Unlike @code{define_insn}, there 6543is no implicit surrounding @code{PARALLEL}. 6544 6545@item 6546The condition, a string containing a C expression. This expression is 6547used to express how the availability of this pattern depends on 6548subclasses of target machine, selected by command-line options when GCC 6549is run. This is just like the condition of a @code{define_insn} that 6550has a standard name. Therefore, the condition (if present) may not 6551depend on the data in the insn being matched, but only the 6552target-machine-type flags. The compiler needs to test these conditions 6553during initialization in order to learn exactly which named instructions 6554are available in a particular run. 6555 6556@item 6557The preparation statements, a string containing zero or more C 6558statements which are to be executed before RTL code is generated from 6559the RTL template. 6560 6561Usually these statements prepare temporary registers for use as 6562internal operands in the RTL template, but they can also generate RTL 6563insns directly by calling routines such as @code{emit_insn}, etc. 6564Any such insns precede the ones that come from the RTL template. 6565@end itemize 6566 6567Every RTL insn emitted by a @code{define_expand} must match some 6568@code{define_insn} in the machine description. Otherwise, the compiler 6569will crash when trying to generate code for the insn or trying to optimize 6570it. 6571 6572The RTL template, in addition to controlling generation of RTL insns, 6573also describes the operands that need to be specified when this pattern 6574is used. In particular, it gives a predicate for each operand. 6575 6576A true operand, which needs to be specified in order to generate RTL from 6577the pattern, should be described with a @code{match_operand} in its first 6578occurrence in the RTL template. This enters information on the operand's 6579predicate into the tables that record such things. GCC uses the 6580information to preload the operand into a register if that is required for 6581valid RTL code. If the operand is referred to more than once, subsequent 6582references should use @code{match_dup}. 6583 6584The RTL template may also refer to internal ``operands'' which are 6585temporary registers or labels used only within the sequence made by the 6586@code{define_expand}. Internal operands are substituted into the RTL 6587template with @code{match_dup}, never with @code{match_operand}. The 6588values of the internal operands are not passed in as arguments by the 6589compiler when it requests use of this pattern. Instead, they are computed 6590within the pattern, in the preparation statements. These statements 6591compute the values and store them into the appropriate elements of 6592@code{operands} so that @code{match_dup} can find them. 6593 6594There are two special macros defined for use in the preparation statements: 6595@code{DONE} and @code{FAIL}. Use them with a following semicolon, 6596as a statement. 6597 6598@table @code 6599 6600@findex DONE 6601@item DONE 6602Use the @code{DONE} macro to end RTL generation for the pattern. The 6603only RTL insns resulting from the pattern on this occasion will be 6604those already emitted by explicit calls to @code{emit_insn} within the 6605preparation statements; the RTL template will not be generated. 6606 6607@findex FAIL 6608@item FAIL 6609Make the pattern fail on this occasion. When a pattern fails, it means 6610that the pattern was not truly available. The calling routines in the 6611compiler will try other strategies for code generation using other patterns. 6612 6613Failure is currently supported only for binary (addition, multiplication, 6614shifting, etc.) and bit-field (@code{extv}, @code{extzv}, and @code{insv}) 6615operations. 6616@end table 6617 6618If the preparation falls through (invokes neither @code{DONE} nor 6619@code{FAIL}), then the @code{define_expand} acts like a 6620@code{define_insn} in that the RTL template is used to generate the 6621insn. 6622 6623The RTL template is not used for matching, only for generating the 6624initial insn list. If the preparation statement always invokes 6625@code{DONE} or @code{FAIL}, the RTL template may be reduced to a simple 6626list of operands, such as this example: 6627 6628@smallexample 6629@group 6630(define_expand "addsi3" 6631 [(match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "") 6632 (match_operand:SI 1 "register_operand" "") 6633 (match_operand:SI 2 "register_operand" "")] 6634@end group 6635@group 6636 "" 6637 " 6638@{ 6639 handle_add (operands[0], operands[1], operands[2]); 6640 DONE; 6641@}") 6642@end group 6643@end smallexample 6644 6645Here is an example, the definition of left-shift for the SPUR chip: 6646 6647@smallexample 6648@group 6649(define_expand "ashlsi3" 6650 [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "") 6651 (ashift:SI 6652@end group 6653@group 6654 (match_operand:SI 1 "register_operand" "") 6655 (match_operand:SI 2 "nonmemory_operand" "")))] 6656 "" 6657 " 6658@end group 6659@end smallexample 6660 6661@smallexample 6662@group 6663@{ 6664 if (GET_CODE (operands[2]) != CONST_INT 6665 || (unsigned) INTVAL (operands[2]) > 3) 6666 FAIL; 6667@}") 6668@end group 6669@end smallexample 6670 6671@noindent 6672This example uses @code{define_expand} so that it can generate an RTL insn 6673for shifting when the shift-count is in the supported range of 0 to 3 but 6674fail in other cases where machine insns aren't available. When it fails, 6675the compiler tries another strategy using different patterns (such as, a 6676library call). 6677 6678If the compiler were able to handle nontrivial condition-strings in 6679patterns with names, then it would be possible to use a 6680@code{define_insn} in that case. Here is another case (zero-extension 6681on the 68000) which makes more use of the power of @code{define_expand}: 6682 6683@smallexample 6684(define_expand "zero_extendhisi2" 6685 [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "") 6686 (const_int 0)) 6687 (set (strict_low_part 6688 (subreg:HI 6689 (match_dup 0) 6690 0)) 6691 (match_operand:HI 1 "general_operand" ""))] 6692 "" 6693 "operands[1] = make_safe_from (operands[1], operands[0]);") 6694@end smallexample 6695 6696@noindent 6697@findex make_safe_from 6698Here two RTL insns are generated, one to clear the entire output operand 6699and the other to copy the input operand into its low half. This sequence 6700is incorrect if the input operand refers to [the old value of] the output 6701operand, so the preparation statement makes sure this isn't so. The 6702function @code{make_safe_from} copies the @code{operands[1]} into a 6703temporary register if it refers to @code{operands[0]}. It does this 6704by emitting another RTL insn. 6705 6706Finally, a third example shows the use of an internal operand. 6707Zero-extension on the SPUR chip is done by @code{and}-ing the result 6708against a halfword mask. But this mask cannot be represented by a 6709@code{const_int} because the constant value is too large to be legitimate 6710on this machine. So it must be copied into a register with 6711@code{force_reg} and then the register used in the @code{and}. 6712 6713@smallexample 6714(define_expand "zero_extendhisi2" 6715 [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "") 6716 (and:SI (subreg:SI 6717 (match_operand:HI 1 "register_operand" "") 6718 0) 6719 (match_dup 2)))] 6720 "" 6721 "operands[2] 6722 = force_reg (SImode, GEN_INT (65535)); ") 6723@end smallexample 6724 6725@emph{Note:} If the @code{define_expand} is used to serve a 6726standard binary or unary arithmetic operation or a bit-field operation, 6727then the last insn it generates must not be a @code{code_label}, 6728@code{barrier} or @code{note}. It must be an @code{insn}, 6729@code{jump_insn} or @code{call_insn}. If you don't need a real insn 6730at the end, emit an insn to copy the result of the operation into 6731itself. Such an insn will generate no code, but it can avoid problems 6732in the compiler. 6733 6734@end ifset 6735@ifset INTERNALS 6736@node Insn Splitting 6737@section Defining How to Split Instructions 6738@cindex insn splitting 6739@cindex instruction splitting 6740@cindex splitting instructions 6741 6742There are two cases where you should specify how to split a pattern 6743into multiple insns. On machines that have instructions requiring 6744delay slots (@pxref{Delay Slots}) or that have instructions whose 6745output is not available for multiple cycles (@pxref{Processor pipeline 6746description}), the compiler phases that optimize these cases need to 6747be able to move insns into one-instruction delay slots. However, some 6748insns may generate more than one machine instruction. These insns 6749cannot be placed into a delay slot. 6750 6751Often you can rewrite the single insn as a list of individual insns, 6752each corresponding to one machine instruction. The disadvantage of 6753doing so is that it will cause the compilation to be slower and require 6754more space. If the resulting insns are too complex, it may also 6755suppress some optimizations. The compiler splits the insn if there is a 6756reason to believe that it might improve instruction or delay slot 6757scheduling. 6758 6759The insn combiner phase also splits putative insns. If three insns are 6760merged into one insn with a complex expression that cannot be matched by 6761some @code{define_insn} pattern, the combiner phase attempts to split 6762the complex pattern into two insns that are recognized. Usually it can 6763break the complex pattern into two patterns by splitting out some 6764subexpression. However, in some other cases, such as performing an 6765addition of a large constant in two insns on a RISC machine, the way to 6766split the addition into two insns is machine-dependent. 6767 6768@findex define_split 6769The @code{define_split} definition tells the compiler how to split a 6770complex insn into several simpler insns. It looks like this: 6771 6772@smallexample 6773(define_split 6774 [@var{insn-pattern}] 6775 "@var{condition}" 6776 [@var{new-insn-pattern-1} 6777 @var{new-insn-pattern-2} 6778 @dots{}] 6779 "@var{preparation-statements}") 6780@end smallexample 6781 6782@var{insn-pattern} is a pattern that needs to be split and 6783@var{condition} is the final condition to be tested, as in a 6784@code{define_insn}. When an insn matching @var{insn-pattern} and 6785satisfying @var{condition} is found, it is replaced in the insn list 6786with the insns given by @var{new-insn-pattern-1}, 6787@var{new-insn-pattern-2}, etc. 6788 6789The @var{preparation-statements} are similar to those statements that 6790are specified for @code{define_expand} (@pxref{Expander Definitions}) 6791and are executed before the new RTL is generated to prepare for the 6792generated code or emit some insns whose pattern is not fixed. Unlike 6793those in @code{define_expand}, however, these statements must not 6794generate any new pseudo-registers. Once reload has completed, they also 6795must not allocate any space in the stack frame. 6796 6797Patterns are matched against @var{insn-pattern} in two different 6798circumstances. If an insn needs to be split for delay slot scheduling 6799or insn scheduling, the insn is already known to be valid, which means 6800that it must have been matched by some @code{define_insn} and, if 6801@code{reload_completed} is nonzero, is known to satisfy the constraints 6802of that @code{define_insn}. In that case, the new insn patterns must 6803also be insns that are matched by some @code{define_insn} and, if 6804@code{reload_completed} is nonzero, must also satisfy the constraints 6805of those definitions. 6806 6807As an example of this usage of @code{define_split}, consider the following 6808example from @file{a29k.md}, which splits a @code{sign_extend} from 6809@code{HImode} to @code{SImode} into a pair of shift insns: 6810 6811@smallexample 6812(define_split 6813 [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "gen_reg_operand" "") 6814 (sign_extend:SI (match_operand:HI 1 "gen_reg_operand" "")))] 6815 "" 6816 [(set (match_dup 0) 6817 (ashift:SI (match_dup 1) 6818 (const_int 16))) 6819 (set (match_dup 0) 6820 (ashiftrt:SI (match_dup 0) 6821 (const_int 16)))] 6822 " 6823@{ operands[1] = gen_lowpart (SImode, operands[1]); @}") 6824@end smallexample 6825 6826When the combiner phase tries to split an insn pattern, it is always the 6827case that the pattern is @emph{not} matched by any @code{define_insn}. 6828The combiner pass first tries to split a single @code{set} expression 6829and then the same @code{set} expression inside a @code{parallel}, but 6830followed by a @code{clobber} of a pseudo-reg to use as a scratch 6831register. In these cases, the combiner expects exactly two new insn 6832patterns to be generated. It will verify that these patterns match some 6833@code{define_insn} definitions, so you need not do this test in the 6834@code{define_split} (of course, there is no point in writing a 6835@code{define_split} that will never produce insns that match). 6836 6837Here is an example of this use of @code{define_split}, taken from 6838@file{rs6000.md}: 6839 6840@smallexample 6841(define_split 6842 [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "gen_reg_operand" "") 6843 (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "gen_reg_operand" "") 6844 (match_operand:SI 2 "non_add_cint_operand" "")))] 6845 "" 6846 [(set (match_dup 0) (plus:SI (match_dup 1) (match_dup 3))) 6847 (set (match_dup 0) (plus:SI (match_dup 0) (match_dup 4)))] 6848" 6849@{ 6850 int low = INTVAL (operands[2]) & 0xffff; 6851 int high = (unsigned) INTVAL (operands[2]) >> 16; 6852 6853 if (low & 0x8000) 6854 high++, low |= 0xffff0000; 6855 6856 operands[3] = GEN_INT (high << 16); 6857 operands[4] = GEN_INT (low); 6858@}") 6859@end smallexample 6860 6861Here the predicate @code{non_add_cint_operand} matches any 6862@code{const_int} that is @emph{not} a valid operand of a single add 6863insn. The add with the smaller displacement is written so that it 6864can be substituted into the address of a subsequent operation. 6865 6866An example that uses a scratch register, from the same file, generates 6867an equality comparison of a register and a large constant: 6868 6869@smallexample 6870(define_split 6871 [(set (match_operand:CC 0 "cc_reg_operand" "") 6872 (compare:CC (match_operand:SI 1 "gen_reg_operand" "") 6873 (match_operand:SI 2 "non_short_cint_operand" ""))) 6874 (clobber (match_operand:SI 3 "gen_reg_operand" ""))] 6875 "find_single_use (operands[0], insn, 0) 6876 && (GET_CODE (*find_single_use (operands[0], insn, 0)) == EQ 6877 || GET_CODE (*find_single_use (operands[0], insn, 0)) == NE)" 6878 [(set (match_dup 3) (xor:SI (match_dup 1) (match_dup 4))) 6879 (set (match_dup 0) (compare:CC (match_dup 3) (match_dup 5)))] 6880 " 6881@{ 6882 /* @r{Get the constant we are comparing against, C, and see what it 6883 looks like sign-extended to 16 bits. Then see what constant 6884 could be XOR'ed with C to get the sign-extended value.} */ 6885 6886 int c = INTVAL (operands[2]); 6887 int sextc = (c << 16) >> 16; 6888 int xorv = c ^ sextc; 6889 6890 operands[4] = GEN_INT (xorv); 6891 operands[5] = GEN_INT (sextc); 6892@}") 6893@end smallexample 6894 6895To avoid confusion, don't write a single @code{define_split} that 6896accepts some insns that match some @code{define_insn} as well as some 6897insns that don't. Instead, write two separate @code{define_split} 6898definitions, one for the insns that are valid and one for the insns that 6899are not valid. 6900 6901The splitter is allowed to split jump instructions into sequence of 6902jumps or create new jumps in while splitting non-jump instructions. As 6903the central flowgraph and branch prediction information needs to be updated, 6904several restriction apply. 6905 6906Splitting of jump instruction into sequence that over by another jump 6907instruction is always valid, as compiler expect identical behavior of new 6908jump. When new sequence contains multiple jump instructions or new labels, 6909more assistance is needed. Splitter is required to create only unconditional 6910jumps, or simple conditional jump instructions. Additionally it must attach a 6911@code{REG_BR_PROB} note to each conditional jump. A global variable 6912@code{split_branch_probability} holds the probability of the original branch in case 6913it was a simple conditional jump, @minus{}1 otherwise. To simplify 6914recomputing of edge frequencies, the new sequence is required to have only 6915forward jumps to the newly created labels. 6916 6917@findex define_insn_and_split 6918For the common case where the pattern of a define_split exactly matches the 6919pattern of a define_insn, use @code{define_insn_and_split}. It looks like 6920this: 6921 6922@smallexample 6923(define_insn_and_split 6924 [@var{insn-pattern}] 6925 "@var{condition}" 6926 "@var{output-template}" 6927 "@var{split-condition}" 6928 [@var{new-insn-pattern-1} 6929 @var{new-insn-pattern-2} 6930 @dots{}] 6931 "@var{preparation-statements}" 6932 [@var{insn-attributes}]) 6933 6934@end smallexample 6935 6936@var{insn-pattern}, @var{condition}, @var{output-template}, and 6937@var{insn-attributes} are used as in @code{define_insn}. The 6938@var{new-insn-pattern} vector and the @var{preparation-statements} are used as 6939in a @code{define_split}. The @var{split-condition} is also used as in 6940@code{define_split}, with the additional behavior that if the condition starts 6941with @samp{&&}, the condition used for the split will be the constructed as a 6942logical ``and'' of the split condition with the insn condition. For example, 6943from i386.md: 6944 6945@smallexample 6946(define_insn_and_split "zero_extendhisi2_and" 6947 [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "=r") 6948 (zero_extend:SI (match_operand:HI 1 "register_operand" "0"))) 6949 (clobber (reg:CC 17))] 6950 "TARGET_ZERO_EXTEND_WITH_AND && !optimize_size" 6951 "#" 6952 "&& reload_completed" 6953 [(parallel [(set (match_dup 0) 6954 (and:SI (match_dup 0) (const_int 65535))) 6955 (clobber (reg:CC 17))])] 6956 "" 6957 [(set_attr "type" "alu1")]) 6958 6959@end smallexample 6960 6961In this case, the actual split condition will be 6962@samp{TARGET_ZERO_EXTEND_WITH_AND && !optimize_size && reload_completed}. 6963 6964The @code{define_insn_and_split} construction provides exactly the same 6965functionality as two separate @code{define_insn} and @code{define_split} 6966patterns. It exists for compactness, and as a maintenance tool to prevent 6967having to ensure the two patterns' templates match. 6968 6969@end ifset 6970@ifset INTERNALS 6971@node Including Patterns 6972@section Including Patterns in Machine Descriptions. 6973@cindex insn includes 6974 6975@findex include 6976The @code{include} pattern tells the compiler tools where to 6977look for patterns that are in files other than in the file 6978@file{.md}. This is used only at build time and there is no preprocessing allowed. 6979 6980It looks like: 6981 6982@smallexample 6983 6984(include 6985 @var{pathname}) 6986@end smallexample 6987 6988For example: 6989 6990@smallexample 6991 6992(include "filestuff") 6993 6994@end smallexample 6995 6996Where @var{pathname} is a string that specifies the location of the file, 6997specifies the include file to be in @file{gcc/config/target/filestuff}. The 6998directory @file{gcc/config/target} is regarded as the default directory. 6999 7000 7001Machine descriptions may be split up into smaller more manageable subsections 7002and placed into subdirectories. 7003 7004By specifying: 7005 7006@smallexample 7007 7008(include "BOGUS/filestuff") 7009 7010@end smallexample 7011 7012the include file is specified to be in @file{gcc/config/@var{target}/BOGUS/filestuff}. 7013 7014Specifying an absolute path for the include file such as; 7015@smallexample 7016 7017(include "/u2/BOGUS/filestuff") 7018 7019@end smallexample 7020is permitted but is not encouraged. 7021 7022@subsection RTL Generation Tool Options for Directory Search 7023@cindex directory options .md 7024@cindex options, directory search 7025@cindex search options 7026 7027The @option{-I@var{dir}} option specifies directories to search for machine descriptions. 7028For example: 7029 7030@smallexample 7031 7032genrecog -I/p1/abc/proc1 -I/p2/abcd/pro2 target.md 7033 7034@end smallexample 7035 7036 7037Add the directory @var{dir} to the head of the list of directories to be 7038searched for header files. This can be used to override a system machine definition 7039file, substituting your own version, since these directories are 7040searched before the default machine description file directories. If you use more than 7041one @option{-I} option, the directories are scanned in left-to-right 7042order; the standard default directory come after. 7043 7044 7045@end ifset 7046@ifset INTERNALS 7047@node Peephole Definitions 7048@section Machine-Specific Peephole Optimizers 7049@cindex peephole optimizer definitions 7050@cindex defining peephole optimizers 7051 7052In addition to instruction patterns the @file{md} file may contain 7053definitions of machine-specific peephole optimizations. 7054 7055The combiner does not notice certain peephole optimizations when the data 7056flow in the program does not suggest that it should try them. For example, 7057sometimes two consecutive insns related in purpose can be combined even 7058though the second one does not appear to use a register computed in the 7059first one. A machine-specific peephole optimizer can detect such 7060opportunities. 7061 7062There are two forms of peephole definitions that may be used. The 7063original @code{define_peephole} is run at assembly output time to 7064match insns and substitute assembly text. Use of @code{define_peephole} 7065is deprecated. 7066 7067A newer @code{define_peephole2} matches insns and substitutes new 7068insns. The @code{peephole2} pass is run after register allocation 7069but before scheduling, which may result in much better code for 7070targets that do scheduling. 7071 7072@menu 7073* define_peephole:: RTL to Text Peephole Optimizers 7074* define_peephole2:: RTL to RTL Peephole Optimizers 7075@end menu 7076 7077@end ifset 7078@ifset INTERNALS 7079@node define_peephole 7080@subsection RTL to Text Peephole Optimizers 7081@findex define_peephole 7082 7083@need 1000 7084A definition looks like this: 7085 7086@smallexample 7087(define_peephole 7088 [@var{insn-pattern-1} 7089 @var{insn-pattern-2} 7090 @dots{}] 7091 "@var{condition}" 7092 "@var{template}" 7093 "@var{optional-insn-attributes}") 7094@end smallexample 7095 7096@noindent 7097The last string operand may be omitted if you are not using any 7098machine-specific information in this machine description. If present, 7099it must obey the same rules as in a @code{define_insn}. 7100 7101In this skeleton, @var{insn-pattern-1} and so on are patterns to match 7102consecutive insns. The optimization applies to a sequence of insns when 7103@var{insn-pattern-1} matches the first one, @var{insn-pattern-2} matches 7104the next, and so on. 7105 7106Each of the insns matched by a peephole must also match a 7107@code{define_insn}. Peepholes are checked only at the last stage just 7108before code generation, and only optionally. Therefore, any insn which 7109would match a peephole but no @code{define_insn} will cause a crash in code 7110generation in an unoptimized compilation, or at various optimization 7111stages. 7112 7113The operands of the insns are matched with @code{match_operands}, 7114@code{match_operator}, and @code{match_dup}, as usual. What is not 7115usual is that the operand numbers apply to all the insn patterns in the 7116definition. So, you can check for identical operands in two insns by 7117using @code{match_operand} in one insn and @code{match_dup} in the 7118other. 7119 7120The operand constraints used in @code{match_operand} patterns do not have 7121any direct effect on the applicability of the peephole, but they will 7122be validated afterward, so make sure your constraints are general enough 7123to apply whenever the peephole matches. If the peephole matches 7124but the constraints are not satisfied, the compiler will crash. 7125 7126It is safe to omit constraints in all the operands of the peephole; or 7127you can write constraints which serve as a double-check on the criteria 7128previously tested. 7129 7130Once a sequence of insns matches the patterns, the @var{condition} is 7131checked. This is a C expression which makes the final decision whether to 7132perform the optimization (we do so if the expression is nonzero). If 7133@var{condition} is omitted (in other words, the string is empty) then the 7134optimization is applied to every sequence of insns that matches the 7135patterns. 7136 7137The defined peephole optimizations are applied after register allocation 7138is complete. Therefore, the peephole definition can check which 7139operands have ended up in which kinds of registers, just by looking at 7140the operands. 7141 7142@findex prev_active_insn 7143The way to refer to the operands in @var{condition} is to write 7144@code{operands[@var{i}]} for operand number @var{i} (as matched by 7145@code{(match_operand @var{i} @dots{})}). Use the variable @code{insn} 7146to refer to the last of the insns being matched; use 7147@code{prev_active_insn} to find the preceding insns. 7148 7149@findex dead_or_set_p 7150When optimizing computations with intermediate results, you can use 7151@var{condition} to match only when the intermediate results are not used 7152elsewhere. Use the C expression @code{dead_or_set_p (@var{insn}, 7153@var{op})}, where @var{insn} is the insn in which you expect the value 7154to be used for the last time (from the value of @code{insn}, together 7155with use of @code{prev_nonnote_insn}), and @var{op} is the intermediate 7156value (from @code{operands[@var{i}]}). 7157 7158Applying the optimization means replacing the sequence of insns with one 7159new insn. The @var{template} controls ultimate output of assembler code 7160for this combined insn. It works exactly like the template of a 7161@code{define_insn}. Operand numbers in this template are the same ones 7162used in matching the original sequence of insns. 7163 7164The result of a defined peephole optimizer does not need to match any of 7165the insn patterns in the machine description; it does not even have an 7166opportunity to match them. The peephole optimizer definition itself serves 7167as the insn pattern to control how the insn is output. 7168 7169Defined peephole optimizers are run as assembler code is being output, 7170so the insns they produce are never combined or rearranged in any way. 7171 7172Here is an example, taken from the 68000 machine description: 7173 7174@smallexample 7175(define_peephole 7176 [(set (reg:SI 15) (plus:SI (reg:SI 15) (const_int 4))) 7177 (set (match_operand:DF 0 "register_operand" "=f") 7178 (match_operand:DF 1 "register_operand" "ad"))] 7179 "FP_REG_P (operands[0]) && ! FP_REG_P (operands[1])" 7180@{ 7181 rtx xoperands[2]; 7182 xoperands[1] = gen_rtx_REG (SImode, REGNO (operands[1]) + 1); 7183#ifdef MOTOROLA 7184 output_asm_insn ("move.l %1,(sp)", xoperands); 7185 output_asm_insn ("move.l %1,-(sp)", operands); 7186 return "fmove.d (sp)+,%0"; 7187#else 7188 output_asm_insn ("movel %1,sp@@", xoperands); 7189 output_asm_insn ("movel %1,sp@@-", operands); 7190 return "fmoved sp@@+,%0"; 7191#endif 7192@}) 7193@end smallexample 7194 7195@need 1000 7196The effect of this optimization is to change 7197 7198@smallexample 7199@group 7200jbsr _foobar 7201addql #4,sp 7202movel d1,sp@@- 7203movel d0,sp@@- 7204fmoved sp@@+,fp0 7205@end group 7206@end smallexample 7207 7208@noindent 7209into 7210 7211@smallexample 7212@group 7213jbsr _foobar 7214movel d1,sp@@ 7215movel d0,sp@@- 7216fmoved sp@@+,fp0 7217@end group 7218@end smallexample 7219 7220@ignore 7221@findex CC_REVERSED 7222If a peephole matches a sequence including one or more jump insns, you must 7223take account of the flags such as @code{CC_REVERSED} which specify that the 7224condition codes are represented in an unusual manner. The compiler 7225automatically alters any ordinary conditional jumps which occur in such 7226situations, but the compiler cannot alter jumps which have been replaced by 7227peephole optimizations. So it is up to you to alter the assembler code 7228that the peephole produces. Supply C code to write the assembler output, 7229and in this C code check the condition code status flags and change the 7230assembler code as appropriate. 7231@end ignore 7232 7233@var{insn-pattern-1} and so on look @emph{almost} like the second 7234operand of @code{define_insn}. There is one important difference: the 7235second operand of @code{define_insn} consists of one or more RTX's 7236enclosed in square brackets. Usually, there is only one: then the same 7237action can be written as an element of a @code{define_peephole}. But 7238when there are multiple actions in a @code{define_insn}, they are 7239implicitly enclosed in a @code{parallel}. Then you must explicitly 7240write the @code{parallel}, and the square brackets within it, in the 7241@code{define_peephole}. Thus, if an insn pattern looks like this, 7242 7243@smallexample 7244(define_insn "divmodsi4" 7245 [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=d") 7246 (div:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "0") 7247 (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "dmsK"))) 7248 (set (match_operand:SI 3 "general_operand" "=d") 7249 (mod:SI (match_dup 1) (match_dup 2)))] 7250 "TARGET_68020" 7251 "divsl%.l %2,%3:%0") 7252@end smallexample 7253 7254@noindent 7255then the way to mention this insn in a peephole is as follows: 7256 7257@smallexample 7258(define_peephole 7259 [@dots{} 7260 (parallel 7261 [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=d") 7262 (div:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "0") 7263 (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "dmsK"))) 7264 (set (match_operand:SI 3 "general_operand" "=d") 7265 (mod:SI (match_dup 1) (match_dup 2)))]) 7266 @dots{}] 7267 @dots{}) 7268@end smallexample 7269 7270@end ifset 7271@ifset INTERNALS 7272@node define_peephole2 7273@subsection RTL to RTL Peephole Optimizers 7274@findex define_peephole2 7275 7276The @code{define_peephole2} definition tells the compiler how to 7277substitute one sequence of instructions for another sequence, 7278what additional scratch registers may be needed and what their 7279lifetimes must be. 7280 7281@smallexample 7282(define_peephole2 7283 [@var{insn-pattern-1} 7284 @var{insn-pattern-2} 7285 @dots{}] 7286 "@var{condition}" 7287 [@var{new-insn-pattern-1} 7288 @var{new-insn-pattern-2} 7289 @dots{}] 7290 "@var{preparation-statements}") 7291@end smallexample 7292 7293The definition is almost identical to @code{define_split} 7294(@pxref{Insn Splitting}) except that the pattern to match is not a 7295single instruction, but a sequence of instructions. 7296 7297It is possible to request additional scratch registers for use in the 7298output template. If appropriate registers are not free, the pattern 7299will simply not match. 7300 7301@findex match_scratch 7302@findex match_dup 7303Scratch registers are requested with a @code{match_scratch} pattern at 7304the top level of the input pattern. The allocated register (initially) will 7305be dead at the point requested within the original sequence. If the scratch 7306is used at more than a single point, a @code{match_dup} pattern at the 7307top level of the input pattern marks the last position in the input sequence 7308at which the register must be available. 7309 7310Here is an example from the IA-32 machine description: 7311 7312@smallexample 7313(define_peephole2 7314 [(match_scratch:SI 2 "r") 7315 (parallel [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "") 7316 (match_operator:SI 3 "arith_or_logical_operator" 7317 [(match_dup 0) 7318 (match_operand:SI 1 "memory_operand" "")])) 7319 (clobber (reg:CC 17))])] 7320 "! optimize_size && ! TARGET_READ_MODIFY" 7321 [(set (match_dup 2) (match_dup 1)) 7322 (parallel [(set (match_dup 0) 7323 (match_op_dup 3 [(match_dup 0) (match_dup 2)])) 7324 (clobber (reg:CC 17))])] 7325 "") 7326@end smallexample 7327 7328@noindent 7329This pattern tries to split a load from its use in the hopes that we'll be 7330able to schedule around the memory load latency. It allocates a single 7331@code{SImode} register of class @code{GENERAL_REGS} (@code{"r"}) that needs 7332to be live only at the point just before the arithmetic. 7333 7334A real example requiring extended scratch lifetimes is harder to come by, 7335so here's a silly made-up example: 7336 7337@smallexample 7338(define_peephole2 7339 [(match_scratch:SI 4 "r") 7340 (set (match_operand:SI 0 "" "") (match_operand:SI 1 "" "")) 7341 (set (match_operand:SI 2 "" "") (match_dup 1)) 7342 (match_dup 4) 7343 (set (match_operand:SI 3 "" "") (match_dup 1))] 7344 "/* @r{determine 1 does not overlap 0 and 2} */" 7345 [(set (match_dup 4) (match_dup 1)) 7346 (set (match_dup 0) (match_dup 4)) 7347 (set (match_dup 2) (match_dup 4))] 7348 (set (match_dup 3) (match_dup 4))] 7349 "") 7350@end smallexample 7351 7352@noindent 7353If we had not added the @code{(match_dup 4)} in the middle of the input 7354sequence, it might have been the case that the register we chose at the 7355beginning of the sequence is killed by the first or second @code{set}. 7356 7357@end ifset 7358@ifset INTERNALS 7359@node Insn Attributes 7360@section Instruction Attributes 7361@cindex insn attributes 7362@cindex instruction attributes 7363 7364In addition to describing the instruction supported by the target machine, 7365the @file{md} file also defines a group of @dfn{attributes} and a set of 7366values for each. Every generated insn is assigned a value for each attribute. 7367One possible attribute would be the effect that the insn has on the machine's 7368condition code. This attribute can then be used by @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} 7369to track the condition codes. 7370 7371@menu 7372* Defining Attributes:: Specifying attributes and their values. 7373* Expressions:: Valid expressions for attribute values. 7374* Tagging Insns:: Assigning attribute values to insns. 7375* Attr Example:: An example of assigning attributes. 7376* Insn Lengths:: Computing the length of insns. 7377* Constant Attributes:: Defining attributes that are constant. 7378* Delay Slots:: Defining delay slots required for a machine. 7379* Processor pipeline description:: Specifying information for insn scheduling. 7380@end menu 7381 7382@end ifset 7383@ifset INTERNALS 7384@node Defining Attributes 7385@subsection Defining Attributes and their Values 7386@cindex defining attributes and their values 7387@cindex attributes, defining 7388 7389@findex define_attr 7390The @code{define_attr} expression is used to define each attribute required 7391by the target machine. It looks like: 7392 7393@smallexample 7394(define_attr @var{name} @var{list-of-values} @var{default}) 7395@end smallexample 7396 7397@var{name} is a string specifying the name of the attribute being defined. 7398Some attributes are used in a special way by the rest of the compiler. The 7399@code{enabled} attribute can be used to conditionally enable or disable 7400insn alternatives (@pxref{Disable Insn Alternatives}). The @code{predicable} 7401attribute, together with a suitable @code{define_cond_exec} 7402(@pxref{Conditional Execution}), can be used to automatically generate 7403conditional variants of instruction patterns. The compiler internally uses 7404the names @code{ce_enabled} and @code{nonce_enabled}, so they should not be 7405used elsewhere as alternative names. 7406 7407@var{list-of-values} is either a string that specifies a comma-separated 7408list of values that can be assigned to the attribute, or a null string to 7409indicate that the attribute takes numeric values. 7410 7411@var{default} is an attribute expression that gives the value of this 7412attribute for insns that match patterns whose definition does not include 7413an explicit value for this attribute. @xref{Attr Example}, for more 7414information on the handling of defaults. @xref{Constant Attributes}, 7415for information on attributes that do not depend on any particular insn. 7416 7417@findex insn-attr.h 7418For each defined attribute, a number of definitions are written to the 7419@file{insn-attr.h} file. For cases where an explicit set of values is 7420specified for an attribute, the following are defined: 7421 7422@itemize @bullet 7423@item 7424A @samp{#define} is written for the symbol @samp{HAVE_ATTR_@var{name}}. 7425 7426@item 7427An enumerated class is defined for @samp{attr_@var{name}} with 7428elements of the form @samp{@var{upper-name}_@var{upper-value}} where 7429the attribute name and value are first converted to uppercase. 7430 7431@item 7432A function @samp{get_attr_@var{name}} is defined that is passed an insn and 7433returns the attribute value for that insn. 7434@end itemize 7435 7436For example, if the following is present in the @file{md} file: 7437 7438@smallexample 7439(define_attr "type" "branch,fp,load,store,arith" @dots{}) 7440@end smallexample 7441 7442@noindent 7443the following lines will be written to the file @file{insn-attr.h}. 7444 7445@smallexample 7446#define HAVE_ATTR_type 7447enum attr_type @{TYPE_BRANCH, TYPE_FP, TYPE_LOAD, 7448 TYPE_STORE, TYPE_ARITH@}; 7449extern enum attr_type get_attr_type (); 7450@end smallexample 7451 7452If the attribute takes numeric values, no @code{enum} type will be 7453defined and the function to obtain the attribute's value will return 7454@code{int}. 7455 7456There are attributes which are tied to a specific meaning. These 7457attributes are not free to use for other purposes: 7458 7459@table @code 7460@item length 7461The @code{length} attribute is used to calculate the length of emitted 7462code chunks. This is especially important when verifying branch 7463distances. @xref{Insn Lengths}. 7464 7465@item enabled 7466The @code{enabled} attribute can be defined to prevent certain 7467alternatives of an insn definition from being used during code 7468generation. @xref{Disable Insn Alternatives}. 7469@end table 7470 7471@findex define_enum_attr 7472@anchor{define_enum_attr} 7473Another way of defining an attribute is to use: 7474 7475@smallexample 7476(define_enum_attr "@var{attr}" "@var{enum}" @var{default}) 7477@end smallexample 7478 7479This works in just the same way as @code{define_attr}, except that 7480the list of values is taken from a separate enumeration called 7481@var{enum} (@pxref{define_enum}). This form allows you to use 7482the same list of values for several attributes without having to 7483repeat the list each time. For example: 7484 7485@smallexample 7486(define_enum "processor" [ 7487 model_a 7488 model_b 7489 @dots{} 7490]) 7491(define_enum_attr "arch" "processor" 7492 (const (symbol_ref "target_arch"))) 7493(define_enum_attr "tune" "processor" 7494 (const (symbol_ref "target_tune"))) 7495@end smallexample 7496 7497defines the same attributes as: 7498 7499@smallexample 7500(define_attr "arch" "model_a,model_b,@dots{}" 7501 (const (symbol_ref "target_arch"))) 7502(define_attr "tune" "model_a,model_b,@dots{}" 7503 (const (symbol_ref "target_tune"))) 7504@end smallexample 7505 7506but without duplicating the processor list. The second example defines two 7507separate C enums (@code{attr_arch} and @code{attr_tune}) whereas the first 7508defines a single C enum (@code{processor}). 7509@end ifset 7510@ifset INTERNALS 7511@node Expressions 7512@subsection Attribute Expressions 7513@cindex attribute expressions 7514 7515RTL expressions used to define attributes use the codes described above 7516plus a few specific to attribute definitions, to be discussed below. 7517Attribute value expressions must have one of the following forms: 7518 7519@table @code 7520@cindex @code{const_int} and attributes 7521@item (const_int @var{i}) 7522The integer @var{i} specifies the value of a numeric attribute. @var{i} 7523must be non-negative. 7524 7525The value of a numeric attribute can be specified either with a 7526@code{const_int}, or as an integer represented as a string in 7527@code{const_string}, @code{eq_attr} (see below), @code{attr}, 7528@code{symbol_ref}, simple arithmetic expressions, and @code{set_attr} 7529overrides on specific instructions (@pxref{Tagging Insns}). 7530 7531@cindex @code{const_string} and attributes 7532@item (const_string @var{value}) 7533The string @var{value} specifies a constant attribute value. 7534If @var{value} is specified as @samp{"*"}, it means that the default value of 7535the attribute is to be used for the insn containing this expression. 7536@samp{"*"} obviously cannot be used in the @var{default} expression 7537of a @code{define_attr}. 7538 7539If the attribute whose value is being specified is numeric, @var{value} 7540must be a string containing a non-negative integer (normally 7541@code{const_int} would be used in this case). Otherwise, it must 7542contain one of the valid values for the attribute. 7543 7544@cindex @code{if_then_else} and attributes 7545@item (if_then_else @var{test} @var{true-value} @var{false-value}) 7546@var{test} specifies an attribute test, whose format is defined below. 7547The value of this expression is @var{true-value} if @var{test} is true, 7548otherwise it is @var{false-value}. 7549 7550@cindex @code{cond} and attributes 7551@item (cond [@var{test1} @var{value1} @dots{}] @var{default}) 7552The first operand of this expression is a vector containing an even 7553number of expressions and consisting of pairs of @var{test} and @var{value} 7554expressions. The value of the @code{cond} expression is that of the 7555@var{value} corresponding to the first true @var{test} expression. If 7556none of the @var{test} expressions are true, the value of the @code{cond} 7557expression is that of the @var{default} expression. 7558@end table 7559 7560@var{test} expressions can have one of the following forms: 7561 7562@table @code 7563@cindex @code{const_int} and attribute tests 7564@item (const_int @var{i}) 7565This test is true if @var{i} is nonzero and false otherwise. 7566 7567@cindex @code{not} and attributes 7568@cindex @code{ior} and attributes 7569@cindex @code{and} and attributes 7570@item (not @var{test}) 7571@itemx (ior @var{test1} @var{test2}) 7572@itemx (and @var{test1} @var{test2}) 7573These tests are true if the indicated logical function is true. 7574 7575@cindex @code{match_operand} and attributes 7576@item (match_operand:@var{m} @var{n} @var{pred} @var{constraints}) 7577This test is true if operand @var{n} of the insn whose attribute value 7578is being determined has mode @var{m} (this part of the test is ignored 7579if @var{m} is @code{VOIDmode}) and the function specified by the string 7580@var{pred} returns a nonzero value when passed operand @var{n} and mode 7581@var{m} (this part of the test is ignored if @var{pred} is the null 7582string). 7583 7584The @var{constraints} operand is ignored and should be the null string. 7585 7586@cindex @code{match_test} and attributes 7587@item (match_test @var{c-expr}) 7588The test is true if C expression @var{c-expr} is true. In non-constant 7589attributes, @var{c-expr} has access to the following variables: 7590 7591@table @var 7592@item insn 7593The rtl instruction under test. 7594@item which_alternative 7595The @code{define_insn} alternative that @var{insn} matches. 7596@xref{Output Statement}. 7597@item operands 7598An array of @var{insn}'s rtl operands. 7599@end table 7600 7601@var{c-expr} behaves like the condition in a C @code{if} statement, 7602so there is no need to explicitly convert the expression into a boolean 76030 or 1 value. For example, the following two tests are equivalent: 7604 7605@smallexample 7606(match_test "x & 2") 7607(match_test "(x & 2) != 0") 7608@end smallexample 7609 7610@cindex @code{le} and attributes 7611@cindex @code{leu} and attributes 7612@cindex @code{lt} and attributes 7613@cindex @code{gt} and attributes 7614@cindex @code{gtu} and attributes 7615@cindex @code{ge} and attributes 7616@cindex @code{geu} and attributes 7617@cindex @code{ne} and attributes 7618@cindex @code{eq} and attributes 7619@cindex @code{plus} and attributes 7620@cindex @code{minus} and attributes 7621@cindex @code{mult} and attributes 7622@cindex @code{div} and attributes 7623@cindex @code{mod} and attributes 7624@cindex @code{abs} and attributes 7625@cindex @code{neg} and attributes 7626@cindex @code{ashift} and attributes 7627@cindex @code{lshiftrt} and attributes 7628@cindex @code{ashiftrt} and attributes 7629@item (le @var{arith1} @var{arith2}) 7630@itemx (leu @var{arith1} @var{arith2}) 7631@itemx (lt @var{arith1} @var{arith2}) 7632@itemx (ltu @var{arith1} @var{arith2}) 7633@itemx (gt @var{arith1} @var{arith2}) 7634@itemx (gtu @var{arith1} @var{arith2}) 7635@itemx (ge @var{arith1} @var{arith2}) 7636@itemx (geu @var{arith1} @var{arith2}) 7637@itemx (ne @var{arith1} @var{arith2}) 7638@itemx (eq @var{arith1} @var{arith2}) 7639These tests are true if the indicated comparison of the two arithmetic 7640expressions is true. Arithmetic expressions are formed with 7641@code{plus}, @code{minus}, @code{mult}, @code{div}, @code{mod}, 7642@code{abs}, @code{neg}, @code{and}, @code{ior}, @code{xor}, @code{not}, 7643@code{ashift}, @code{lshiftrt}, and @code{ashiftrt} expressions. 7644 7645@findex get_attr 7646@code{const_int} and @code{symbol_ref} are always valid terms (@pxref{Insn 7647Lengths},for additional forms). @code{symbol_ref} is a string 7648denoting a C expression that yields an @code{int} when evaluated by the 7649@samp{get_attr_@dots{}} routine. It should normally be a global 7650variable. 7651 7652@findex eq_attr 7653@item (eq_attr @var{name} @var{value}) 7654@var{name} is a string specifying the name of an attribute. 7655 7656@var{value} is a string that is either a valid value for attribute 7657@var{name}, a comma-separated list of values, or @samp{!} followed by a 7658value or list. If @var{value} does not begin with a @samp{!}, this 7659test is true if the value of the @var{name} attribute of the current 7660insn is in the list specified by @var{value}. If @var{value} begins 7661with a @samp{!}, this test is true if the attribute's value is 7662@emph{not} in the specified list. 7663 7664For example, 7665 7666@smallexample 7667(eq_attr "type" "load,store") 7668@end smallexample 7669 7670@noindent 7671is equivalent to 7672 7673@smallexample 7674(ior (eq_attr "type" "load") (eq_attr "type" "store")) 7675@end smallexample 7676 7677If @var{name} specifies an attribute of @samp{alternative}, it refers to the 7678value of the compiler variable @code{which_alternative} 7679(@pxref{Output Statement}) and the values must be small integers. For 7680example, 7681 7682@smallexample 7683(eq_attr "alternative" "2,3") 7684@end smallexample 7685 7686@noindent 7687is equivalent to 7688 7689@smallexample 7690(ior (eq (symbol_ref "which_alternative") (const_int 2)) 7691 (eq (symbol_ref "which_alternative") (const_int 3))) 7692@end smallexample 7693 7694Note that, for most attributes, an @code{eq_attr} test is simplified in cases 7695where the value of the attribute being tested is known for all insns matching 7696a particular pattern. This is by far the most common case. 7697 7698@findex attr_flag 7699@item (attr_flag @var{name}) 7700The value of an @code{attr_flag} expression is true if the flag 7701specified by @var{name} is true for the @code{insn} currently being 7702scheduled. 7703 7704@var{name} is a string specifying one of a fixed set of flags to test. 7705Test the flags @code{forward} and @code{backward} to determine the 7706direction of a conditional branch. Test the flags @code{very_likely}, 7707@code{likely}, @code{very_unlikely}, and @code{unlikely} to determine 7708if a conditional branch is expected to be taken. 7709 7710If the @code{very_likely} flag is true, then the @code{likely} flag is also 7711true. Likewise for the @code{very_unlikely} and @code{unlikely} flags. 7712 7713This example describes a conditional branch delay slot which 7714can be nullified for forward branches that are taken (annul-true) or 7715for backward branches which are not taken (annul-false). 7716 7717@smallexample 7718(define_delay (eq_attr "type" "cbranch") 7719 [(eq_attr "in_branch_delay" "true") 7720 (and (eq_attr "in_branch_delay" "true") 7721 (attr_flag "forward")) 7722 (and (eq_attr "in_branch_delay" "true") 7723 (attr_flag "backward"))]) 7724@end smallexample 7725 7726The @code{forward} and @code{backward} flags are false if the current 7727@code{insn} being scheduled is not a conditional branch. 7728 7729The @code{very_likely} and @code{likely} flags are true if the 7730@code{insn} being scheduled is not a conditional branch. 7731The @code{very_unlikely} and @code{unlikely} flags are false if the 7732@code{insn} being scheduled is not a conditional branch. 7733 7734@code{attr_flag} is only used during delay slot scheduling and has no 7735meaning to other passes of the compiler. 7736 7737@findex attr 7738@item (attr @var{name}) 7739The value of another attribute is returned. This is most useful 7740for numeric attributes, as @code{eq_attr} and @code{attr_flag} 7741produce more efficient code for non-numeric attributes. 7742@end table 7743 7744@end ifset 7745@ifset INTERNALS 7746@node Tagging Insns 7747@subsection Assigning Attribute Values to Insns 7748@cindex tagging insns 7749@cindex assigning attribute values to insns 7750 7751The value assigned to an attribute of an insn is primarily determined by 7752which pattern is matched by that insn (or which @code{define_peephole} 7753generated it). Every @code{define_insn} and @code{define_peephole} can 7754have an optional last argument to specify the values of attributes for 7755matching insns. The value of any attribute not specified in a particular 7756insn is set to the default value for that attribute, as specified in its 7757@code{define_attr}. Extensive use of default values for attributes 7758permits the specification of the values for only one or two attributes 7759in the definition of most insn patterns, as seen in the example in the 7760next section. 7761 7762The optional last argument of @code{define_insn} and 7763@code{define_peephole} is a vector of expressions, each of which defines 7764the value for a single attribute. The most general way of assigning an 7765attribute's value is to use a @code{set} expression whose first operand is an 7766@code{attr} expression giving the name of the attribute being set. The 7767second operand of the @code{set} is an attribute expression 7768(@pxref{Expressions}) giving the value of the attribute. 7769 7770When the attribute value depends on the @samp{alternative} attribute 7771(i.e., which is the applicable alternative in the constraint of the 7772insn), the @code{set_attr_alternative} expression can be used. It 7773allows the specification of a vector of attribute expressions, one for 7774each alternative. 7775 7776@findex set_attr 7777When the generality of arbitrary attribute expressions is not required, 7778the simpler @code{set_attr} expression can be used, which allows 7779specifying a string giving either a single attribute value or a list 7780of attribute values, one for each alternative. 7781 7782The form of each of the above specifications is shown below. In each case, 7783@var{name} is a string specifying the attribute to be set. 7784 7785@table @code 7786@item (set_attr @var{name} @var{value-string}) 7787@var{value-string} is either a string giving the desired attribute value, 7788or a string containing a comma-separated list giving the values for 7789succeeding alternatives. The number of elements must match the number 7790of alternatives in the constraint of the insn pattern. 7791 7792Note that it may be useful to specify @samp{*} for some alternative, in 7793which case the attribute will assume its default value for insns matching 7794that alternative. 7795 7796@findex set_attr_alternative 7797@item (set_attr_alternative @var{name} [@var{value1} @var{value2} @dots{}]) 7798Depending on the alternative of the insn, the value will be one of the 7799specified values. This is a shorthand for using a @code{cond} with 7800tests on the @samp{alternative} attribute. 7801 7802@findex attr 7803@item (set (attr @var{name}) @var{value}) 7804The first operand of this @code{set} must be the special RTL expression 7805@code{attr}, whose sole operand is a string giving the name of the 7806attribute being set. @var{value} is the value of the attribute. 7807@end table 7808 7809The following shows three different ways of representing the same 7810attribute value specification: 7811 7812@smallexample 7813(set_attr "type" "load,store,arith") 7814 7815(set_attr_alternative "type" 7816 [(const_string "load") (const_string "store") 7817 (const_string "arith")]) 7818 7819(set (attr "type") 7820 (cond [(eq_attr "alternative" "1") (const_string "load") 7821 (eq_attr "alternative" "2") (const_string "store")] 7822 (const_string "arith"))) 7823@end smallexample 7824 7825@need 1000 7826@findex define_asm_attributes 7827The @code{define_asm_attributes} expression provides a mechanism to 7828specify the attributes assigned to insns produced from an @code{asm} 7829statement. It has the form: 7830 7831@smallexample 7832(define_asm_attributes [@var{attr-sets}]) 7833@end smallexample 7834 7835@noindent 7836where @var{attr-sets} is specified the same as for both the 7837@code{define_insn} and the @code{define_peephole} expressions. 7838 7839These values will typically be the ``worst case'' attribute values. For 7840example, they might indicate that the condition code will be clobbered. 7841 7842A specification for a @code{length} attribute is handled specially. The 7843way to compute the length of an @code{asm} insn is to multiply the 7844length specified in the expression @code{define_asm_attributes} by the 7845number of machine instructions specified in the @code{asm} statement, 7846determined by counting the number of semicolons and newlines in the 7847string. Therefore, the value of the @code{length} attribute specified 7848in a @code{define_asm_attributes} should be the maximum possible length 7849of a single machine instruction. 7850 7851@end ifset 7852@ifset INTERNALS 7853@node Attr Example 7854@subsection Example of Attribute Specifications 7855@cindex attribute specifications example 7856@cindex attribute specifications 7857 7858The judicious use of defaulting is important in the efficient use of 7859insn attributes. Typically, insns are divided into @dfn{types} and an 7860attribute, customarily called @code{type}, is used to represent this 7861value. This attribute is normally used only to define the default value 7862for other attributes. An example will clarify this usage. 7863 7864Assume we have a RISC machine with a condition code and in which only 7865full-word operations are performed in registers. Let us assume that we 7866can divide all insns into loads, stores, (integer) arithmetic 7867operations, floating point operations, and branches. 7868 7869Here we will concern ourselves with determining the effect of an insn on 7870the condition code and will limit ourselves to the following possible 7871effects: The condition code can be set unpredictably (clobbered), not 7872be changed, be set to agree with the results of the operation, or only 7873changed if the item previously set into the condition code has been 7874modified. 7875 7876Here is part of a sample @file{md} file for such a machine: 7877 7878@smallexample 7879(define_attr "type" "load,store,arith,fp,branch" (const_string "arith")) 7880 7881(define_attr "cc" "clobber,unchanged,set,change0" 7882 (cond [(eq_attr "type" "load") 7883 (const_string "change0") 7884 (eq_attr "type" "store,branch") 7885 (const_string "unchanged") 7886 (eq_attr "type" "arith") 7887 (if_then_else (match_operand:SI 0 "" "") 7888 (const_string "set") 7889 (const_string "clobber"))] 7890 (const_string "clobber"))) 7891 7892(define_insn "" 7893 [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r,r,m") 7894 (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "r,m,r"))] 7895 "" 7896 "@@ 7897 move %0,%1 7898 load %0,%1 7899 store %0,%1" 7900 [(set_attr "type" "arith,load,store")]) 7901@end smallexample 7902 7903Note that we assume in the above example that arithmetic operations 7904performed on quantities smaller than a machine word clobber the condition 7905code since they will set the condition code to a value corresponding to the 7906full-word result. 7907 7908@end ifset 7909@ifset INTERNALS 7910@node Insn Lengths 7911@subsection Computing the Length of an Insn 7912@cindex insn lengths, computing 7913@cindex computing the length of an insn 7914 7915For many machines, multiple types of branch instructions are provided, each 7916for different length branch displacements. In most cases, the assembler 7917will choose the correct instruction to use. However, when the assembler 7918cannot do so, GCC can when a special attribute, the @code{length} 7919attribute, is defined. This attribute must be defined to have numeric 7920values by specifying a null string in its @code{define_attr}. 7921 7922In the case of the @code{length} attribute, two additional forms of 7923arithmetic terms are allowed in test expressions: 7924 7925@table @code 7926@cindex @code{match_dup} and attributes 7927@item (match_dup @var{n}) 7928This refers to the address of operand @var{n} of the current insn, which 7929must be a @code{label_ref}. 7930 7931@cindex @code{pc} and attributes 7932@item (pc) 7933This refers to the address of the @emph{current} insn. It might have 7934been more consistent with other usage to make this the address of the 7935@emph{next} insn but this would be confusing because the length of the 7936current insn is to be computed. 7937@end table 7938 7939@cindex @code{addr_vec}, length of 7940@cindex @code{addr_diff_vec}, length of 7941For normal insns, the length will be determined by value of the 7942@code{length} attribute. In the case of @code{addr_vec} and 7943@code{addr_diff_vec} insn patterns, the length is computed as 7944the number of vectors multiplied by the size of each vector. 7945 7946Lengths are measured in addressable storage units (bytes). 7947 7948The following macros can be used to refine the length computation: 7949 7950@table @code 7951@findex ADJUST_INSN_LENGTH 7952@item ADJUST_INSN_LENGTH (@var{insn}, @var{length}) 7953If defined, modifies the length assigned to instruction @var{insn} as a 7954function of the context in which it is used. @var{length} is an lvalue 7955that contains the initially computed length of the insn and should be 7956updated with the correct length of the insn. 7957 7958This macro will normally not be required. A case in which it is 7959required is the ROMP@. On this machine, the size of an @code{addr_vec} 7960insn must be increased by two to compensate for the fact that alignment 7961may be required. 7962@end table 7963 7964@findex get_attr_length 7965The routine that returns @code{get_attr_length} (the value of the 7966@code{length} attribute) can be used by the output routine to 7967determine the form of the branch instruction to be written, as the 7968example below illustrates. 7969 7970As an example of the specification of variable-length branches, consider 7971the IBM 360. If we adopt the convention that a register will be set to 7972the starting address of a function, we can jump to labels within 4k of 7973the start using a four-byte instruction. Otherwise, we need a six-byte 7974sequence to load the address from memory and then branch to it. 7975 7976On such a machine, a pattern for a branch instruction might be specified 7977as follows: 7978 7979@smallexample 7980(define_insn "jump" 7981 [(set (pc) 7982 (label_ref (match_operand 0 "" "")))] 7983 "" 7984@{ 7985 return (get_attr_length (insn) == 4 7986 ? "b %l0" : "l r15,=a(%l0); br r15"); 7987@} 7988 [(set (attr "length") 7989 (if_then_else (lt (match_dup 0) (const_int 4096)) 7990 (const_int 4) 7991 (const_int 6)))]) 7992@end smallexample 7993 7994@end ifset 7995@ifset INTERNALS 7996@node Constant Attributes 7997@subsection Constant Attributes 7998@cindex constant attributes 7999 8000A special form of @code{define_attr}, where the expression for the 8001default value is a @code{const} expression, indicates an attribute that 8002is constant for a given run of the compiler. Constant attributes may be 8003used to specify which variety of processor is used. For example, 8004 8005@smallexample 8006(define_attr "cpu" "m88100,m88110,m88000" 8007 (const 8008 (cond [(symbol_ref "TARGET_88100") (const_string "m88100") 8009 (symbol_ref "TARGET_88110") (const_string "m88110")] 8010 (const_string "m88000")))) 8011 8012(define_attr "memory" "fast,slow" 8013 (const 8014 (if_then_else (symbol_ref "TARGET_FAST_MEM") 8015 (const_string "fast") 8016 (const_string "slow")))) 8017@end smallexample 8018 8019The routine generated for constant attributes has no parameters as it 8020does not depend on any particular insn. RTL expressions used to define 8021the value of a constant attribute may use the @code{symbol_ref} form, 8022but may not use either the @code{match_operand} form or @code{eq_attr} 8023forms involving insn attributes. 8024 8025@end ifset 8026@ifset INTERNALS 8027@node Delay Slots 8028@subsection Delay Slot Scheduling 8029@cindex delay slots, defining 8030 8031The insn attribute mechanism can be used to specify the requirements for 8032delay slots, if any, on a target machine. An instruction is said to 8033require a @dfn{delay slot} if some instructions that are physically 8034after the instruction are executed as if they were located before it. 8035Classic examples are branch and call instructions, which often execute 8036the following instruction before the branch or call is performed. 8037 8038On some machines, conditional branch instructions can optionally 8039@dfn{annul} instructions in the delay slot. This means that the 8040instruction will not be executed for certain branch outcomes. Both 8041instructions that annul if the branch is true and instructions that 8042annul if the branch is false are supported. 8043 8044Delay slot scheduling differs from instruction scheduling in that 8045determining whether an instruction needs a delay slot is dependent only 8046on the type of instruction being generated, not on data flow between the 8047instructions. See the next section for a discussion of data-dependent 8048instruction scheduling. 8049 8050@findex define_delay 8051The requirement of an insn needing one or more delay slots is indicated 8052via the @code{define_delay} expression. It has the following form: 8053 8054@smallexample 8055(define_delay @var{test} 8056 [@var{delay-1} @var{annul-true-1} @var{annul-false-1} 8057 @var{delay-2} @var{annul-true-2} @var{annul-false-2} 8058 @dots{}]) 8059@end smallexample 8060 8061@var{test} is an attribute test that indicates whether this 8062@code{define_delay} applies to a particular insn. If so, the number of 8063required delay slots is determined by the length of the vector specified 8064as the second argument. An insn placed in delay slot @var{n} must 8065satisfy attribute test @var{delay-n}. @var{annul-true-n} is an 8066attribute test that specifies which insns may be annulled if the branch 8067is true. Similarly, @var{annul-false-n} specifies which insns in the 8068delay slot may be annulled if the branch is false. If annulling is not 8069supported for that delay slot, @code{(nil)} should be coded. 8070 8071For example, in the common case where branch and call insns require 8072a single delay slot, which may contain any insn other than a branch or 8073call, the following would be placed in the @file{md} file: 8074 8075@smallexample 8076(define_delay (eq_attr "type" "branch,call") 8077 [(eq_attr "type" "!branch,call") (nil) (nil)]) 8078@end smallexample 8079 8080Multiple @code{define_delay} expressions may be specified. In this 8081case, each such expression specifies different delay slot requirements 8082and there must be no insn for which tests in two @code{define_delay} 8083expressions are both true. 8084 8085For example, if we have a machine that requires one delay slot for branches 8086but two for calls, no delay slot can contain a branch or call insn, 8087and any valid insn in the delay slot for the branch can be annulled if the 8088branch is true, we might represent this as follows: 8089 8090@smallexample 8091(define_delay (eq_attr "type" "branch") 8092 [(eq_attr "type" "!branch,call") 8093 (eq_attr "type" "!branch,call") 8094 (nil)]) 8095 8096(define_delay (eq_attr "type" "call") 8097 [(eq_attr "type" "!branch,call") (nil) (nil) 8098 (eq_attr "type" "!branch,call") (nil) (nil)]) 8099@end smallexample 8100@c the above is *still* too long. --mew 4feb93 8101 8102@end ifset 8103@ifset INTERNALS 8104@node Processor pipeline description 8105@subsection Specifying processor pipeline description 8106@cindex processor pipeline description 8107@cindex processor functional units 8108@cindex instruction latency time 8109@cindex interlock delays 8110@cindex data dependence delays 8111@cindex reservation delays 8112@cindex pipeline hazard recognizer 8113@cindex automaton based pipeline description 8114@cindex regular expressions 8115@cindex deterministic finite state automaton 8116@cindex automaton based scheduler 8117@cindex RISC 8118@cindex VLIW 8119 8120To achieve better performance, most modern processors 8121(super-pipelined, superscalar @acronym{RISC}, and @acronym{VLIW} 8122processors) have many @dfn{functional units} on which several 8123instructions can be executed simultaneously. An instruction starts 8124execution if its issue conditions are satisfied. If not, the 8125instruction is stalled until its conditions are satisfied. Such 8126@dfn{interlock (pipeline) delay} causes interruption of the fetching 8127of successor instructions (or demands nop instructions, e.g.@: for some 8128MIPS processors). 8129 8130There are two major kinds of interlock delays in modern processors. 8131The first one is a data dependence delay determining @dfn{instruction 8132latency time}. The instruction execution is not started until all 8133source data have been evaluated by prior instructions (there are more 8134complex cases when the instruction execution starts even when the data 8135are not available but will be ready in given time after the 8136instruction execution start). Taking the data dependence delays into 8137account is simple. The data dependence (true, output, and 8138anti-dependence) delay between two instructions is given by a 8139constant. In most cases this approach is adequate. The second kind 8140of interlock delays is a reservation delay. The reservation delay 8141means that two instructions under execution will be in need of shared 8142processors resources, i.e.@: buses, internal registers, and/or 8143functional units, which are reserved for some time. Taking this kind 8144of delay into account is complex especially for modern @acronym{RISC} 8145processors. 8146 8147The task of exploiting more processor parallelism is solved by an 8148instruction scheduler. For a better solution to this problem, the 8149instruction scheduler has to have an adequate description of the 8150processor parallelism (or @dfn{pipeline description}). GCC 8151machine descriptions describe processor parallelism and functional 8152unit reservations for groups of instructions with the aid of 8153@dfn{regular expressions}. 8154 8155The GCC instruction scheduler uses a @dfn{pipeline hazard recognizer} to 8156figure out the possibility of the instruction issue by the processor 8157on a given simulated processor cycle. The pipeline hazard recognizer is 8158automatically generated from the processor pipeline description. The 8159pipeline hazard recognizer generated from the machine description 8160is based on a deterministic finite state automaton (@acronym{DFA}): 8161the instruction issue is possible if there is a transition from one 8162automaton state to another one. This algorithm is very fast, and 8163furthermore, its speed is not dependent on processor 8164complexity@footnote{However, the size of the automaton depends on 8165processor complexity. To limit this effect, machine descriptions 8166can split orthogonal parts of the machine description among several 8167automata: but then, since each of these must be stepped independently, 8168this does cause a small decrease in the algorithm's performance.}. 8169 8170@cindex automaton based pipeline description 8171The rest of this section describes the directives that constitute 8172an automaton-based processor pipeline description. The order of 8173these constructions within the machine description file is not 8174important. 8175 8176@findex define_automaton 8177@cindex pipeline hazard recognizer 8178The following optional construction describes names of automata 8179generated and used for the pipeline hazards recognition. Sometimes 8180the generated finite state automaton used by the pipeline hazard 8181recognizer is large. If we use more than one automaton and bind functional 8182units to the automata, the total size of the automata is usually 8183less than the size of the single automaton. If there is no one such 8184construction, only one finite state automaton is generated. 8185 8186@smallexample 8187(define_automaton @var{automata-names}) 8188@end smallexample 8189 8190@var{automata-names} is a string giving names of the automata. The 8191names are separated by commas. All the automata should have unique names. 8192The automaton name is used in the constructions @code{define_cpu_unit} and 8193@code{define_query_cpu_unit}. 8194 8195@findex define_cpu_unit 8196@cindex processor functional units 8197Each processor functional unit used in the description of instruction 8198reservations should be described by the following construction. 8199 8200@smallexample 8201(define_cpu_unit @var{unit-names} [@var{automaton-name}]) 8202@end smallexample 8203 8204@var{unit-names} is a string giving the names of the functional units 8205separated by commas. Don't use name @samp{nothing}, it is reserved 8206for other goals. 8207 8208@var{automaton-name} is a string giving the name of the automaton with 8209which the unit is bound. The automaton should be described in 8210construction @code{define_automaton}. You should give 8211@dfn{automaton-name}, if there is a defined automaton. 8212 8213The assignment of units to automata are constrained by the uses of the 8214units in insn reservations. The most important constraint is: if a 8215unit reservation is present on a particular cycle of an alternative 8216for an insn reservation, then some unit from the same automaton must 8217be present on the same cycle for the other alternatives of the insn 8218reservation. The rest of the constraints are mentioned in the 8219description of the subsequent constructions. 8220 8221@findex define_query_cpu_unit 8222@cindex querying function unit reservations 8223The following construction describes CPU functional units analogously 8224to @code{define_cpu_unit}. The reservation of such units can be 8225queried for an automaton state. The instruction scheduler never 8226queries reservation of functional units for given automaton state. So 8227as a rule, you don't need this construction. This construction could 8228be used for future code generation goals (e.g.@: to generate 8229@acronym{VLIW} insn templates). 8230 8231@smallexample 8232(define_query_cpu_unit @var{unit-names} [@var{automaton-name}]) 8233@end smallexample 8234 8235@var{unit-names} is a string giving names of the functional units 8236separated by commas. 8237 8238@var{automaton-name} is a string giving the name of the automaton with 8239which the unit is bound. 8240 8241@findex define_insn_reservation 8242@cindex instruction latency time 8243@cindex regular expressions 8244@cindex data bypass 8245The following construction is the major one to describe pipeline 8246characteristics of an instruction. 8247 8248@smallexample 8249(define_insn_reservation @var{insn-name} @var{default_latency} 8250 @var{condition} @var{regexp}) 8251@end smallexample 8252 8253@var{default_latency} is a number giving latency time of the 8254instruction. There is an important difference between the old 8255description and the automaton based pipeline description. The latency 8256time is used for all dependencies when we use the old description. In 8257the automaton based pipeline description, the given latency time is only 8258used for true dependencies. The cost of anti-dependencies is always 8259zero and the cost of output dependencies is the difference between 8260latency times of the producing and consuming insns (if the difference 8261is negative, the cost is considered to be zero). You can always 8262change the default costs for any description by using the target hook 8263@code{TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_COST} (@pxref{Scheduling}). 8264 8265@var{insn-name} is a string giving the internal name of the insn. The 8266internal names are used in constructions @code{define_bypass} and in 8267the automaton description file generated for debugging. The internal 8268name has nothing in common with the names in @code{define_insn}. It is a 8269good practice to use insn classes described in the processor manual. 8270 8271@var{condition} defines what RTL insns are described by this 8272construction. You should remember that you will be in trouble if 8273@var{condition} for two or more different 8274@code{define_insn_reservation} constructions is TRUE for an insn. In 8275this case what reservation will be used for the insn is not defined. 8276Such cases are not checked during generation of the pipeline hazards 8277recognizer because in general recognizing that two conditions may have 8278the same value is quite difficult (especially if the conditions 8279contain @code{symbol_ref}). It is also not checked during the 8280pipeline hazard recognizer work because it would slow down the 8281recognizer considerably. 8282 8283@var{regexp} is a string describing the reservation of the cpu's functional 8284units by the instruction. The reservations are described by a regular 8285expression according to the following syntax: 8286 8287@smallexample 8288 regexp = regexp "," oneof 8289 | oneof 8290 8291 oneof = oneof "|" allof 8292 | allof 8293 8294 allof = allof "+" repeat 8295 | repeat 8296 8297 repeat = element "*" number 8298 | element 8299 8300 element = cpu_function_unit_name 8301 | reservation_name 8302 | result_name 8303 | "nothing" 8304 | "(" regexp ")" 8305@end smallexample 8306 8307@itemize @bullet 8308@item 8309@samp{,} is used for describing the start of the next cycle in 8310the reservation. 8311 8312@item 8313@samp{|} is used for describing a reservation described by the first 8314regular expression @strong{or} a reservation described by the second 8315regular expression @strong{or} etc. 8316 8317@item 8318@samp{+} is used for describing a reservation described by the first 8319regular expression @strong{and} a reservation described by the 8320second regular expression @strong{and} etc. 8321 8322@item 8323@samp{*} is used for convenience and simply means a sequence in which 8324the regular expression are repeated @var{number} times with cycle 8325advancing (see @samp{,}). 8326 8327@item 8328@samp{cpu_function_unit_name} denotes reservation of the named 8329functional unit. 8330 8331@item 8332@samp{reservation_name} --- see description of construction 8333@samp{define_reservation}. 8334 8335@item 8336@samp{nothing} denotes no unit reservations. 8337@end itemize 8338 8339@findex define_reservation 8340Sometimes unit reservations for different insns contain common parts. 8341In such case, you can simplify the pipeline description by describing 8342the common part by the following construction 8343 8344@smallexample 8345(define_reservation @var{reservation-name} @var{regexp}) 8346@end smallexample 8347 8348@var{reservation-name} is a string giving name of @var{regexp}. 8349Functional unit names and reservation names are in the same name 8350space. So the reservation names should be different from the 8351functional unit names and can not be the reserved name @samp{nothing}. 8352 8353@findex define_bypass 8354@cindex instruction latency time 8355@cindex data bypass 8356The following construction is used to describe exceptions in the 8357latency time for given instruction pair. This is so called bypasses. 8358 8359@smallexample 8360(define_bypass @var{number} @var{out_insn_names} @var{in_insn_names} 8361 [@var{guard}]) 8362@end smallexample 8363 8364@var{number} defines when the result generated by the instructions 8365given in string @var{out_insn_names} will be ready for the 8366instructions given in string @var{in_insn_names}. Each of these 8367strings is a comma-separated list of filename-style globs and 8368they refer to the names of @code{define_insn_reservation}s. 8369For example: 8370@smallexample 8371(define_bypass 1 "cpu1_load_*, cpu1_store_*" "cpu1_load_*") 8372@end smallexample 8373defines a bypass between instructions that start with 8374@samp{cpu1_load_} or @samp{cpu1_store_} and those that start with 8375@samp{cpu1_load_}. 8376 8377@var{guard} is an optional string giving the name of a C function which 8378defines an additional guard for the bypass. The function will get the 8379two insns as parameters. If the function returns zero the bypass will 8380be ignored for this case. The additional guard is necessary to 8381recognize complicated bypasses, e.g.@: when the consumer is only an address 8382of insn @samp{store} (not a stored value). 8383 8384If there are more one bypass with the same output and input insns, the 8385chosen bypass is the first bypass with a guard in description whose 8386guard function returns nonzero. If there is no such bypass, then 8387bypass without the guard function is chosen. 8388 8389@findex exclusion_set 8390@findex presence_set 8391@findex final_presence_set 8392@findex absence_set 8393@findex final_absence_set 8394@cindex VLIW 8395@cindex RISC 8396The following five constructions are usually used to describe 8397@acronym{VLIW} processors, or more precisely, to describe a placement 8398of small instructions into @acronym{VLIW} instruction slots. They 8399can be used for @acronym{RISC} processors, too. 8400 8401@smallexample 8402(exclusion_set @var{unit-names} @var{unit-names}) 8403(presence_set @var{unit-names} @var{patterns}) 8404(final_presence_set @var{unit-names} @var{patterns}) 8405(absence_set @var{unit-names} @var{patterns}) 8406(final_absence_set @var{unit-names} @var{patterns}) 8407@end smallexample 8408 8409@var{unit-names} is a string giving names of functional units 8410separated by commas. 8411 8412@var{patterns} is a string giving patterns of functional units 8413separated by comma. Currently pattern is one unit or units 8414separated by white-spaces. 8415 8416The first construction (@samp{exclusion_set}) means that each 8417functional unit in the first string can not be reserved simultaneously 8418with a unit whose name is in the second string and vice versa. For 8419example, the construction is useful for describing processors 8420(e.g.@: some SPARC processors) with a fully pipelined floating point 8421functional unit which can execute simultaneously only single floating 8422point insns or only double floating point insns. 8423 8424The second construction (@samp{presence_set}) means that each 8425functional unit in the first string can not be reserved unless at 8426least one of pattern of units whose names are in the second string is 8427reserved. This is an asymmetric relation. For example, it is useful 8428for description that @acronym{VLIW} @samp{slot1} is reserved after 8429@samp{slot0} reservation. We could describe it by the following 8430construction 8431 8432@smallexample 8433(presence_set "slot1" "slot0") 8434@end smallexample 8435 8436Or @samp{slot1} is reserved only after @samp{slot0} and unit @samp{b0} 8437reservation. In this case we could write 8438 8439@smallexample 8440(presence_set "slot1" "slot0 b0") 8441@end smallexample 8442 8443The third construction (@samp{final_presence_set}) is analogous to 8444@samp{presence_set}. The difference between them is when checking is 8445done. When an instruction is issued in given automaton state 8446reflecting all current and planned unit reservations, the automaton 8447state is changed. The first state is a source state, the second one 8448is a result state. Checking for @samp{presence_set} is done on the 8449source state reservation, checking for @samp{final_presence_set} is 8450done on the result reservation. This construction is useful to 8451describe a reservation which is actually two subsequent reservations. 8452For example, if we use 8453 8454@smallexample 8455(presence_set "slot1" "slot0") 8456@end smallexample 8457 8458the following insn will be never issued (because @samp{slot1} requires 8459@samp{slot0} which is absent in the source state). 8460 8461@smallexample 8462(define_reservation "insn_and_nop" "slot0 + slot1") 8463@end smallexample 8464 8465but it can be issued if we use analogous @samp{final_presence_set}. 8466 8467The forth construction (@samp{absence_set}) means that each functional 8468unit in the first string can be reserved only if each pattern of units 8469whose names are in the second string is not reserved. This is an 8470asymmetric relation (actually @samp{exclusion_set} is analogous to 8471this one but it is symmetric). For example it might be useful in a 8472@acronym{VLIW} description to say that @samp{slot0} cannot be reserved 8473after either @samp{slot1} or @samp{slot2} have been reserved. This 8474can be described as: 8475 8476@smallexample 8477(absence_set "slot0" "slot1, slot2") 8478@end smallexample 8479 8480Or @samp{slot2} can not be reserved if @samp{slot0} and unit @samp{b0} 8481are reserved or @samp{slot1} and unit @samp{b1} are reserved. In 8482this case we could write 8483 8484@smallexample 8485(absence_set "slot2" "slot0 b0, slot1 b1") 8486@end smallexample 8487 8488All functional units mentioned in a set should belong to the same 8489automaton. 8490 8491The last construction (@samp{final_absence_set}) is analogous to 8492@samp{absence_set} but checking is done on the result (state) 8493reservation. See comments for @samp{final_presence_set}. 8494 8495@findex automata_option 8496@cindex deterministic finite state automaton 8497@cindex nondeterministic finite state automaton 8498@cindex finite state automaton minimization 8499You can control the generator of the pipeline hazard recognizer with 8500the following construction. 8501 8502@smallexample 8503(automata_option @var{options}) 8504@end smallexample 8505 8506@var{options} is a string giving options which affect the generated 8507code. Currently there are the following options: 8508 8509@itemize @bullet 8510@item 8511@dfn{no-minimization} makes no minimization of the automaton. This is 8512only worth to do when we are debugging the description and need to 8513look more accurately at reservations of states. 8514 8515@item 8516@dfn{time} means printing time statistics about the generation of 8517automata. 8518 8519@item 8520@dfn{stats} means printing statistics about the generated automata 8521such as the number of DFA states, NDFA states and arcs. 8522 8523@item 8524@dfn{v} means a generation of the file describing the result automata. 8525The file has suffix @samp{.dfa} and can be used for the description 8526verification and debugging. 8527 8528@item 8529@dfn{w} means a generation of warning instead of error for 8530non-critical errors. 8531 8532@item 8533@dfn{no-comb-vect} prevents the automaton generator from generating 8534two data structures and comparing them for space efficiency. Using 8535a comb vector to represent transitions may be better, but it can be 8536very expensive to construct. This option is useful if the build 8537process spends an unacceptably long time in genautomata. 8538 8539@item 8540@dfn{ndfa} makes nondeterministic finite state automata. This affects 8541the treatment of operator @samp{|} in the regular expressions. The 8542usual treatment of the operator is to try the first alternative and, 8543if the reservation is not possible, the second alternative. The 8544nondeterministic treatment means trying all alternatives, some of them 8545may be rejected by reservations in the subsequent insns. 8546 8547@item 8548@dfn{collapse-ndfa} modifies the behaviour of the generator when 8549producing an automaton. An additional state transition to collapse a 8550nondeterministic @acronym{NDFA} state to a deterministic @acronym{DFA} 8551state is generated. It can be triggered by passing @code{const0_rtx} to 8552state_transition. In such an automaton, cycle advance transitions are 8553available only for these collapsed states. This option is useful for 8554ports that want to use the @code{ndfa} option, but also want to use 8555@code{define_query_cpu_unit} to assign units to insns issued in a cycle. 8556 8557@item 8558@dfn{progress} means output of a progress bar showing how many states 8559were generated so far for automaton being processed. This is useful 8560during debugging a @acronym{DFA} description. If you see too many 8561generated states, you could interrupt the generator of the pipeline 8562hazard recognizer and try to figure out a reason for generation of the 8563huge automaton. 8564@end itemize 8565 8566As an example, consider a superscalar @acronym{RISC} machine which can 8567issue three insns (two integer insns and one floating point insn) on 8568the cycle but can finish only two insns. To describe this, we define 8569the following functional units. 8570 8571@smallexample 8572(define_cpu_unit "i0_pipeline, i1_pipeline, f_pipeline") 8573(define_cpu_unit "port0, port1") 8574@end smallexample 8575 8576All simple integer insns can be executed in any integer pipeline and 8577their result is ready in two cycles. The simple integer insns are 8578issued into the first pipeline unless it is reserved, otherwise they 8579are issued into the second pipeline. Integer division and 8580multiplication insns can be executed only in the second integer 8581pipeline and their results are ready correspondingly in 8 and 4 8582cycles. The integer division is not pipelined, i.e.@: the subsequent 8583integer division insn can not be issued until the current division 8584insn finished. Floating point insns are fully pipelined and their 8585results are ready in 3 cycles. Where the result of a floating point 8586insn is used by an integer insn, an additional delay of one cycle is 8587incurred. To describe all of this we could specify 8588 8589@smallexample 8590(define_cpu_unit "div") 8591 8592(define_insn_reservation "simple" 2 (eq_attr "type" "int") 8593 "(i0_pipeline | i1_pipeline), (port0 | port1)") 8594 8595(define_insn_reservation "mult" 4 (eq_attr "type" "mult") 8596 "i1_pipeline, nothing*2, (port0 | port1)") 8597 8598(define_insn_reservation "div" 8 (eq_attr "type" "div") 8599 "i1_pipeline, div*7, div + (port0 | port1)") 8600 8601(define_insn_reservation "float" 3 (eq_attr "type" "float") 8602 "f_pipeline, nothing, (port0 | port1)) 8603 8604(define_bypass 4 "float" "simple,mult,div") 8605@end smallexample 8606 8607To simplify the description we could describe the following reservation 8608 8609@smallexample 8610(define_reservation "finish" "port0|port1") 8611@end smallexample 8612 8613and use it in all @code{define_insn_reservation} as in the following 8614construction 8615 8616@smallexample 8617(define_insn_reservation "simple" 2 (eq_attr "type" "int") 8618 "(i0_pipeline | i1_pipeline), finish") 8619@end smallexample 8620 8621 8622@end ifset 8623@ifset INTERNALS 8624@node Conditional Execution 8625@section Conditional Execution 8626@cindex conditional execution 8627@cindex predication 8628 8629A number of architectures provide for some form of conditional 8630execution, or predication. The hallmark of this feature is the 8631ability to nullify most of the instructions in the instruction set. 8632When the instruction set is large and not entirely symmetric, it 8633can be quite tedious to describe these forms directly in the 8634@file{.md} file. An alternative is the @code{define_cond_exec} template. 8635 8636@findex define_cond_exec 8637@smallexample 8638(define_cond_exec 8639 [@var{predicate-pattern}] 8640 "@var{condition}" 8641 "@var{output-template}") 8642@end smallexample 8643 8644@var{predicate-pattern} is the condition that must be true for the 8645insn to be executed at runtime and should match a relational operator. 8646One can use @code{match_operator} to match several relational operators 8647at once. Any @code{match_operand} operands must have no more than one 8648alternative. 8649 8650@var{condition} is a C expression that must be true for the generated 8651pattern to match. 8652 8653@findex current_insn_predicate 8654@var{output-template} is a string similar to the @code{define_insn} 8655output template (@pxref{Output Template}), except that the @samp{*} 8656and @samp{@@} special cases do not apply. This is only useful if the 8657assembly text for the predicate is a simple prefix to the main insn. 8658In order to handle the general case, there is a global variable 8659@code{current_insn_predicate} that will contain the entire predicate 8660if the current insn is predicated, and will otherwise be @code{NULL}. 8661 8662When @code{define_cond_exec} is used, an implicit reference to 8663the @code{predicable} instruction attribute is made. 8664@xref{Insn Attributes}. This attribute must be a boolean (i.e.@: have 8665exactly two elements in its @var{list-of-values}), with the possible 8666values being @code{no} and @code{yes}. The default and all uses in 8667the insns must be a simple constant, not a complex expressions. It 8668may, however, depend on the alternative, by using a comma-separated 8669list of values. If that is the case, the port should also define an 8670@code{enabled} attribute (@pxref{Disable Insn Alternatives}), which 8671should also allow only @code{no} and @code{yes} as its values. 8672 8673For each @code{define_insn} for which the @code{predicable} 8674attribute is true, a new @code{define_insn} pattern will be 8675generated that matches a predicated version of the instruction. 8676For example, 8677 8678@smallexample 8679(define_insn "addsi" 8680 [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "r") 8681 (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "register_operand" "r") 8682 (match_operand:SI 2 "register_operand" "r")))] 8683 "@var{test1}" 8684 "add %2,%1,%0") 8685 8686(define_cond_exec 8687 [(ne (match_operand:CC 0 "register_operand" "c") 8688 (const_int 0))] 8689 "@var{test2}" 8690 "(%0)") 8691@end smallexample 8692 8693@noindent 8694generates a new pattern 8695 8696@smallexample 8697(define_insn "" 8698 [(cond_exec 8699 (ne (match_operand:CC 3 "register_operand" "c") (const_int 0)) 8700 (set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "r") 8701 (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "register_operand" "r") 8702 (match_operand:SI 2 "register_operand" "r"))))] 8703 "(@var{test2}) && (@var{test1})" 8704 "(%3) add %2,%1,%0") 8705@end smallexample 8706 8707@end ifset 8708@ifset INTERNALS 8709@node Constant Definitions 8710@section Constant Definitions 8711@cindex constant definitions 8712@findex define_constants 8713 8714Using literal constants inside instruction patterns reduces legibility and 8715can be a maintenance problem. 8716 8717To overcome this problem, you may use the @code{define_constants} 8718expression. It contains a vector of name-value pairs. From that 8719point on, wherever any of the names appears in the MD file, it is as 8720if the corresponding value had been written instead. You may use 8721@code{define_constants} multiple times; each appearance adds more 8722constants to the table. It is an error to redefine a constant with 8723a different value. 8724 8725To come back to the a29k load multiple example, instead of 8726 8727@smallexample 8728(define_insn "" 8729 [(match_parallel 0 "load_multiple_operation" 8730 [(set (match_operand:SI 1 "gpc_reg_operand" "=r") 8731 (match_operand:SI 2 "memory_operand" "m")) 8732 (use (reg:SI 179)) 8733 (clobber (reg:SI 179))])] 8734 "" 8735 "loadm 0,0,%1,%2") 8736@end smallexample 8737 8738You could write: 8739 8740@smallexample 8741(define_constants [ 8742 (R_BP 177) 8743 (R_FC 178) 8744 (R_CR 179) 8745 (R_Q 180) 8746]) 8747 8748(define_insn "" 8749 [(match_parallel 0 "load_multiple_operation" 8750 [(set (match_operand:SI 1 "gpc_reg_operand" "=r") 8751 (match_operand:SI 2 "memory_operand" "m")) 8752 (use (reg:SI R_CR)) 8753 (clobber (reg:SI R_CR))])] 8754 "" 8755 "loadm 0,0,%1,%2") 8756@end smallexample 8757 8758The constants that are defined with a define_constant are also output 8759in the insn-codes.h header file as #defines. 8760 8761@cindex enumerations 8762@findex define_c_enum 8763You can also use the machine description file to define enumerations. 8764Like the constants defined by @code{define_constant}, these enumerations 8765are visible to both the machine description file and the main C code. 8766 8767The syntax is as follows: 8768 8769@smallexample 8770(define_c_enum "@var{name}" [ 8771 @var{value0} 8772 @var{value1} 8773 @dots{} 8774 @var{valuen} 8775]) 8776@end smallexample 8777 8778This definition causes the equivalent of the following C code to appear 8779in @file{insn-constants.h}: 8780 8781@smallexample 8782enum @var{name} @{ 8783 @var{value0} = 0, 8784 @var{value1} = 1, 8785 @dots{} 8786 @var{valuen} = @var{n} 8787@}; 8788#define NUM_@var{cname}_VALUES (@var{n} + 1) 8789@end smallexample 8790 8791where @var{cname} is the capitalized form of @var{name}. 8792It also makes each @var{valuei} available in the machine description 8793file, just as if it had been declared with: 8794 8795@smallexample 8796(define_constants [(@var{valuei} @var{i})]) 8797@end smallexample 8798 8799Each @var{valuei} is usually an upper-case identifier and usually 8800begins with @var{cname}. 8801 8802You can split the enumeration definition into as many statements as 8803you like. The above example is directly equivalent to: 8804 8805@smallexample 8806(define_c_enum "@var{name}" [@var{value0}]) 8807(define_c_enum "@var{name}" [@var{value1}]) 8808@dots{} 8809(define_c_enum "@var{name}" [@var{valuen}]) 8810@end smallexample 8811 8812Splitting the enumeration helps to improve the modularity of each 8813individual @code{.md} file. For example, if a port defines its 8814synchronization instructions in a separate @file{sync.md} file, 8815it is convenient to define all synchronization-specific enumeration 8816values in @file{sync.md} rather than in the main @file{.md} file. 8817 8818Some enumeration names have special significance to GCC: 8819 8820@table @code 8821@item unspecv 8822@findex unspec_volatile 8823If an enumeration called @code{unspecv} is defined, GCC will use it 8824when printing out @code{unspec_volatile} expressions. For example: 8825 8826@smallexample 8827(define_c_enum "unspecv" [ 8828 UNSPECV_BLOCKAGE 8829]) 8830@end smallexample 8831 8832causes GCC to print @samp{(unspec_volatile @dots{} 0)} as: 8833 8834@smallexample 8835(unspec_volatile ... UNSPECV_BLOCKAGE) 8836@end smallexample 8837 8838@item unspec 8839@findex unspec 8840If an enumeration called @code{unspec} is defined, GCC will use 8841it when printing out @code{unspec} expressions. GCC will also use 8842it when printing out @code{unspec_volatile} expressions unless an 8843@code{unspecv} enumeration is also defined. You can therefore 8844decide whether to keep separate enumerations for volatile and 8845non-volatile expressions or whether to use the same enumeration 8846for both. 8847@end table 8848 8849@findex define_enum 8850@anchor{define_enum} 8851Another way of defining an enumeration is to use @code{define_enum}: 8852 8853@smallexample 8854(define_enum "@var{name}" [ 8855 @var{value0} 8856 @var{value1} 8857 @dots{} 8858 @var{valuen} 8859]) 8860@end smallexample 8861 8862This directive implies: 8863 8864@smallexample 8865(define_c_enum "@var{name}" [ 8866 @var{cname}_@var{cvalue0} 8867 @var{cname}_@var{cvalue1} 8868 @dots{} 8869 @var{cname}_@var{cvaluen} 8870]) 8871@end smallexample 8872 8873@findex define_enum_attr 8874where @var{cvaluei} is the capitalized form of @var{valuei}. 8875However, unlike @code{define_c_enum}, the enumerations defined 8876by @code{define_enum} can be used in attribute specifications 8877(@pxref{define_enum_attr}). 8878@end ifset 8879@ifset INTERNALS 8880@node Iterators 8881@section Iterators 8882@cindex iterators in @file{.md} files 8883 8884Ports often need to define similar patterns for more than one machine 8885mode or for more than one rtx code. GCC provides some simple iterator 8886facilities to make this process easier. 8887 8888@menu 8889* Mode Iterators:: Generating variations of patterns for different modes. 8890* Code Iterators:: Doing the same for codes. 8891@end menu 8892 8893@node Mode Iterators 8894@subsection Mode Iterators 8895@cindex mode iterators in @file{.md} files 8896 8897Ports often need to define similar patterns for two or more different modes. 8898For example: 8899 8900@itemize @bullet 8901@item 8902If a processor has hardware support for both single and double 8903floating-point arithmetic, the @code{SFmode} patterns tend to be 8904very similar to the @code{DFmode} ones. 8905 8906@item 8907If a port uses @code{SImode} pointers in one configuration and 8908@code{DImode} pointers in another, it will usually have very similar 8909@code{SImode} and @code{DImode} patterns for manipulating pointers. 8910@end itemize 8911 8912Mode iterators allow several patterns to be instantiated from one 8913@file{.md} file template. They can be used with any type of 8914rtx-based construct, such as a @code{define_insn}, 8915@code{define_split}, or @code{define_peephole2}. 8916 8917@menu 8918* Defining Mode Iterators:: Defining a new mode iterator. 8919* Substitutions:: Combining mode iterators with substitutions 8920* Examples:: Examples 8921@end menu 8922 8923@node Defining Mode Iterators 8924@subsubsection Defining Mode Iterators 8925@findex define_mode_iterator 8926 8927The syntax for defining a mode iterator is: 8928 8929@smallexample 8930(define_mode_iterator @var{name} [(@var{mode1} "@var{cond1}") @dots{} (@var{moden} "@var{condn}")]) 8931@end smallexample 8932 8933This allows subsequent @file{.md} file constructs to use the mode suffix 8934@code{:@var{name}}. Every construct that does so will be expanded 8935@var{n} times, once with every use of @code{:@var{name}} replaced by 8936@code{:@var{mode1}}, once with every use replaced by @code{:@var{mode2}}, 8937and so on. In the expansion for a particular @var{modei}, every 8938C condition will also require that @var{condi} be true. 8939 8940For example: 8941 8942@smallexample 8943(define_mode_iterator P [(SI "Pmode == SImode") (DI "Pmode == DImode")]) 8944@end smallexample 8945 8946defines a new mode suffix @code{:P}. Every construct that uses 8947@code{:P} will be expanded twice, once with every @code{:P} replaced 8948by @code{:SI} and once with every @code{:P} replaced by @code{:DI}. 8949The @code{:SI} version will only apply if @code{Pmode == SImode} and 8950the @code{:DI} version will only apply if @code{Pmode == DImode}. 8951 8952As with other @file{.md} conditions, an empty string is treated 8953as ``always true''. @code{(@var{mode} "")} can also be abbreviated 8954to @code{@var{mode}}. For example: 8955 8956@smallexample 8957(define_mode_iterator GPR [SI (DI "TARGET_64BIT")]) 8958@end smallexample 8959 8960means that the @code{:DI} expansion only applies if @code{TARGET_64BIT} 8961but that the @code{:SI} expansion has no such constraint. 8962 8963Iterators are applied in the order they are defined. This can be 8964significant if two iterators are used in a construct that requires 8965substitutions. @xref{Substitutions}. 8966 8967@node Substitutions 8968@subsubsection Substitution in Mode Iterators 8969@findex define_mode_attr 8970 8971If an @file{.md} file construct uses mode iterators, each version of the 8972construct will often need slightly different strings or modes. For 8973example: 8974 8975@itemize @bullet 8976@item 8977When a @code{define_expand} defines several @code{add@var{m}3} patterns 8978(@pxref{Standard Names}), each expander will need to use the 8979appropriate mode name for @var{m}. 8980 8981@item 8982When a @code{define_insn} defines several instruction patterns, 8983each instruction will often use a different assembler mnemonic. 8984 8985@item 8986When a @code{define_insn} requires operands with different modes, 8987using an iterator for one of the operand modes usually requires a specific 8988mode for the other operand(s). 8989@end itemize 8990 8991GCC supports such variations through a system of ``mode attributes''. 8992There are two standard attributes: @code{mode}, which is the name of 8993the mode in lower case, and @code{MODE}, which is the same thing in 8994upper case. You can define other attributes using: 8995 8996@smallexample 8997(define_mode_attr @var{name} [(@var{mode1} "@var{value1}") @dots{} (@var{moden} "@var{valuen}")]) 8998@end smallexample 8999 9000where @var{name} is the name of the attribute and @var{valuei} 9001is the value associated with @var{modei}. 9002 9003When GCC replaces some @var{:iterator} with @var{:mode}, it will scan 9004each string and mode in the pattern for sequences of the form 9005@code{<@var{iterator}:@var{attr}>}, where @var{attr} is the name of a 9006mode attribute. If the attribute is defined for @var{mode}, the whole 9007@code{<@dots{}>} sequence will be replaced by the appropriate attribute 9008value. 9009 9010For example, suppose an @file{.md} file has: 9011 9012@smallexample 9013(define_mode_iterator P [(SI "Pmode == SImode") (DI "Pmode == DImode")]) 9014(define_mode_attr load [(SI "lw") (DI "ld")]) 9015@end smallexample 9016 9017If one of the patterns that uses @code{:P} contains the string 9018@code{"<P:load>\t%0,%1"}, the @code{SI} version of that pattern 9019will use @code{"lw\t%0,%1"} and the @code{DI} version will use 9020@code{"ld\t%0,%1"}. 9021 9022Here is an example of using an attribute for a mode: 9023 9024@smallexample 9025(define_mode_iterator LONG [SI DI]) 9026(define_mode_attr SHORT [(SI "HI") (DI "SI")]) 9027(define_insn @dots{} 9028 (sign_extend:LONG (match_operand:<LONG:SHORT> @dots{})) @dots{}) 9029@end smallexample 9030 9031The @code{@var{iterator}:} prefix may be omitted, in which case the 9032substitution will be attempted for every iterator expansion. 9033 9034@node Examples 9035@subsubsection Mode Iterator Examples 9036 9037Here is an example from the MIPS port. It defines the following 9038modes and attributes (among others): 9039 9040@smallexample 9041(define_mode_iterator GPR [SI (DI "TARGET_64BIT")]) 9042(define_mode_attr d [(SI "") (DI "d")]) 9043@end smallexample 9044 9045and uses the following template to define both @code{subsi3} 9046and @code{subdi3}: 9047 9048@smallexample 9049(define_insn "sub<mode>3" 9050 [(set (match_operand:GPR 0 "register_operand" "=d") 9051 (minus:GPR (match_operand:GPR 1 "register_operand" "d") 9052 (match_operand:GPR 2 "register_operand" "d")))] 9053 "" 9054 "<d>subu\t%0,%1,%2" 9055 [(set_attr "type" "arith") 9056 (set_attr "mode" "<MODE>")]) 9057@end smallexample 9058 9059This is exactly equivalent to: 9060 9061@smallexample 9062(define_insn "subsi3" 9063 [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "=d") 9064 (minus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "register_operand" "d") 9065 (match_operand:SI 2 "register_operand" "d")))] 9066 "" 9067 "subu\t%0,%1,%2" 9068 [(set_attr "type" "arith") 9069 (set_attr "mode" "SI")]) 9070 9071(define_insn "subdi3" 9072 [(set (match_operand:DI 0 "register_operand" "=d") 9073 (minus:DI (match_operand:DI 1 "register_operand" "d") 9074 (match_operand:DI 2 "register_operand" "d")))] 9075 "" 9076 "dsubu\t%0,%1,%2" 9077 [(set_attr "type" "arith") 9078 (set_attr "mode" "DI")]) 9079@end smallexample 9080 9081@node Code Iterators 9082@subsection Code Iterators 9083@cindex code iterators in @file{.md} files 9084@findex define_code_iterator 9085@findex define_code_attr 9086 9087Code iterators operate in a similar way to mode iterators. @xref{Mode Iterators}. 9088 9089The construct: 9090 9091@smallexample 9092(define_code_iterator @var{name} [(@var{code1} "@var{cond1}") @dots{} (@var{coden} "@var{condn}")]) 9093@end smallexample 9094 9095defines a pseudo rtx code @var{name} that can be instantiated as 9096@var{codei} if condition @var{condi} is true. Each @var{codei} 9097must have the same rtx format. @xref{RTL Classes}. 9098 9099As with mode iterators, each pattern that uses @var{name} will be 9100expanded @var{n} times, once with all uses of @var{name} replaced by 9101@var{code1}, once with all uses replaced by @var{code2}, and so on. 9102@xref{Defining Mode Iterators}. 9103 9104It is possible to define attributes for codes as well as for modes. 9105There are two standard code attributes: @code{code}, the name of the 9106code in lower case, and @code{CODE}, the name of the code in upper case. 9107Other attributes are defined using: 9108 9109@smallexample 9110(define_code_attr @var{name} [(@var{code1} "@var{value1}") @dots{} (@var{coden} "@var{valuen}")]) 9111@end smallexample 9112 9113Here's an example of code iterators in action, taken from the MIPS port: 9114 9115@smallexample 9116(define_code_iterator any_cond [unordered ordered unlt unge uneq ltgt unle ungt 9117 eq ne gt ge lt le gtu geu ltu leu]) 9118 9119(define_expand "b<code>" 9120 [(set (pc) 9121 (if_then_else (any_cond:CC (cc0) 9122 (const_int 0)) 9123 (label_ref (match_operand 0 "")) 9124 (pc)))] 9125 "" 9126@{ 9127 gen_conditional_branch (operands, <CODE>); 9128 DONE; 9129@}) 9130@end smallexample 9131 9132This is equivalent to: 9133 9134@smallexample 9135(define_expand "bunordered" 9136 [(set (pc) 9137 (if_then_else (unordered:CC (cc0) 9138 (const_int 0)) 9139 (label_ref (match_operand 0 "")) 9140 (pc)))] 9141 "" 9142@{ 9143 gen_conditional_branch (operands, UNORDERED); 9144 DONE; 9145@}) 9146 9147(define_expand "bordered" 9148 [(set (pc) 9149 (if_then_else (ordered:CC (cc0) 9150 (const_int 0)) 9151 (label_ref (match_operand 0 "")) 9152 (pc)))] 9153 "" 9154@{ 9155 gen_conditional_branch (operands, ORDERED); 9156 DONE; 9157@}) 9158 9159@dots{} 9160@end smallexample 9161 9162@end ifset 9163